22.10.2014 Views

Operator's Guide - Kodak

Operator's Guide - Kodak

Operator's Guide - Kodak

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

KODAK VERSAMARK<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


KODAK VERSAMARK<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Roll-Roll Configuration


FCC Compliance Statement<br />

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These<br />

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.<br />

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,<br />

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,<br />

in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.<br />

Note: Good quality, shielded (braided shielded) cables must be used for the RS-232-C and Centronics interfaces.<br />

Canadian EMI Compliance Statement<br />

Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A<br />

prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.<br />

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations<br />

of the Canadian Department of Communications.<br />

EMI-CISPR 22/EN 55 022/CE Marking<br />

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be<br />

required to take adequate measures.<br />

KODAK VERSAMARK VX5000/5000e Printing Systems Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Part Number Medium Revision Date Description ECN<br />

0114304-602<br />

0114304-603<br />

Print<br />

PDF<br />

001 04/2005<br />

Initial release, roll-to-roll configuration. Includes<br />

page correlation, HEPA, web cleaner, CS300/<br />

400/600, DT90/91/92.<br />

K5223<br />

© Eastman <strong>Kodak</strong> Company, 2005. All rights reserved.<br />

This document contains proprietary information of <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. or its licensors and is their exclusive property. It may not be<br />

reproduced without a written agreement from <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. No patent or other license is granted to this information.<br />

The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may not be used or copied except as provided in<br />

the license agreement.<br />

<strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. makes no warranty of any kind with regard to the contents of this document, including, but not limited to, the implied<br />

warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark shall not be liable for any errors or for compensatory,<br />

incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or the examples contained herein.<br />

Information concerning products not manufactured by <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. is provided without warranty or representation of any kind, and<br />

<strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. will not be liable for any damages resulting from the use of such information.<br />

<strong>Kodak</strong> and Versamark are trademarks of Eastman <strong>Kodak</strong> Company.<br />

0114304-602<br />

0114304-603 05/2005 Printed in U.S.A.


Scope<br />

The VX5000 Printing System and the VX5000e Printing System are<br />

modular printing systems that offer the full range of variable, color inkjet<br />

printing.<br />

This Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> describes procedures used to operate, maintain,<br />

and troubleshoot the printing systems, including any purchased options.<br />

As needed, the operator should refer to separate documents for operating<br />

the controller (the KODAK VERSAMARK CS300 system controller, KODAK<br />

VERSAMARK CS400 system controller, or KODAK VERSAMARK CS600 system<br />

controller) or the KODAK VERSAMARK DT9000 series print stations.<br />

Note: Due to continuing improvement in the controller products, small differences<br />

between the actual software and the screen representations in this<br />

book may be seen.<br />

The current revision of the Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> provides updated information<br />

on new or revised components that provide page correlation, web<br />

cleaning, and air filtration. Sections have been added to document<br />

system-wide procedures that use the controller software, and that information<br />

includes complete reference to the specific software displayed by<br />

each controller. Some additional minor edits have been made to clarify<br />

existing material.<br />

Refer to the printing system Safety Labels for complete definitions of all<br />

labels and a description of all precautions to be taken while operating the<br />

printing system.<br />

Only trained personnel should operate the printing system. Trained<br />

personnel include users who are trained by <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc.<br />

employees or who have received training from company-trained personnel.<br />

Training includes the safety instructions as well as instructions on<br />

mechanical functions and equipment operation.<br />

This document does not describe diagnostic procedures or equipment<br />

service. Only <strong>Kodak</strong> Versamark, Inc. service technicians or servicetrained<br />

personnel should perform diagnostics and equipment service.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

iii


Scope<br />

Text Notations<br />

Text Notations<br />

This manual uses the following typographical conventions.<br />

This style<br />

Ready<br />

go<br />

ENTER<br />

[NEXT]<br />

Save<br />

File → Open<br />

ALT+F1<br />

ALT, TAB<br />

xx,yy<br />

jobfile.dat<br />

Refers to<br />

Text displayed by the software.<br />

Anything you type, exactly as it appears, whether referenced<br />

in text or at a prompt.<br />

Special keys on the keyboard, such as enter, alt, and<br />

spacebar.<br />

Buttons and lights on the printer operator panel.<br />

Software command buttons and sections of dialog boxes,<br />

such as group boxes, text boxes, and text fields.<br />

A menu and a specific menu command.<br />

Pressing more than one key at the same time.<br />

Pressing more than one key in sequence.<br />

Variable in error messages and text.<br />

File names.<br />

Safety Notations<br />

The following definitions indicate safety precautions to the operator.<br />

Note: Information that needs to be brought to the reader’s attention.<br />

Caution: A situation where a mistake could result in the destruction of data or<br />

system-type damage.<br />

! WARNING<br />

A potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.<br />

! DANGER<br />

An imminent hazard that will result in serious injury or death.<br />

iv<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Scope<br />

Text Notations<br />

Service and Support<br />

Technical equipment support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.<br />

Software and applications support is available 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.<br />

EST/EDT, Monday through Friday.<br />

Call for telephone or on-site technical support; to order parts or supplies;<br />

to request documentation or product information.<br />

U.S.A., Canada, and<br />

worldwide<br />

Phone<br />

+1-800-472-4839<br />

+1-937-259-3739<br />

Fax<br />

+1-937-259-3808<br />

Europe +41-22-354-1400 +41-22-354-1480<br />

Asia/Pacific Rim +65-6744-6400 +65-6744-6700<br />

Japan +81-3-5621-2220 +81-3-5621-2221<br />

Updated service<br />

information<br />

Customer support<br />

http://www.kodakversamark.com<br />

customer@kodakversamark.com<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

v


Contents<br />

Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Control Box Controls......................................................................................... 1-2<br />

Transformer Controls........................................................................................ 1-3<br />

Compressor Controls........................................................................................ 1-3<br />

Unwind Unit Controls ........................................................................................ 1-4<br />

External Unwind Unit Controls ................................................................... 1-4<br />

Internal Unwind Unit Controls..................................................................... 1-7<br />

Spacer Unit Controls......................................................................................... 1-9<br />

Web Cleaner Controls .................................................................................... 1-10<br />

Print Tower Controls ....................................................................................... 1-11<br />

Print Tower A Controls ............................................................................. 1-11<br />

HEPA Filters............................................................................................. 1-14<br />

Printhead Position Controls...................................................................... 1-15<br />

Print Towers B and C Controls................................................................. 1-16<br />

Print Tower D Controls............................................................................. 1-17<br />

Operator Display, Print Tower D .............................................................. 1-19<br />

Main Screen—Printing Speed Control............................................... 1-19<br />

APU Screen—Unwind Control........................................................... 1-22<br />

Web Screen—Tension Control .......................................................... 1-23<br />

Pull Ratio Screen—Gripper Roller Control ........................................ 1-24<br />

Dryer Screen—Temperature Control................................................. 1-26<br />

Registration Screen—Printhead Position Control.............................. 1-28<br />

Error Screen ...................................................................................... 1-29<br />

IJP Cover Screen............................................................................... 1-30<br />

Dryer Error Screen............................................................................. 1-30<br />

Printhead Lateral Error Screen .......................................................... 1-31<br />

APU Cover Screen ............................................................................ 1-31<br />

APU Error Screen .............................................................................. 1-31<br />

APR Cover Screen ............................................................................ 1-32<br />

APR Error Screen .............................................................................. 1-32<br />

Still Picture Unit Controls ................................................................................ 1-32<br />

Rewind Unit Controls ...................................................................................... 1-35<br />

Controller ........................................................................................................ 1-37<br />

Print Stations .................................................................................................. 1-38<br />

Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Overview........................................................................................................... 2-1<br />

Procedures While Printing a Job................................................................ 2-2<br />

Recovering from Problems......................................................................... 2-3<br />

Turning off the System ............................................................................... 2-3<br />

Preliminary Operations ..................................................................................... 2-3<br />

Turning the Printing System On ................................................................. 2-3<br />

Webbing the Printing System..................................................................... 2-4<br />

Loading and Unloading Paper at the Unwind Unit............................... 2-4<br />

Roll Position on the Unwind Shaft ....................................................... 2-8<br />

Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind Unit............................... 2-8<br />

Webbing the Unwind Unit .................................................................. 2-10<br />

Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong> ................................................................... 2-12<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> vii


Contents<br />

Webbing the Spacer Unit ................................................................... 2-13<br />

Jogging the Web ................................................................................ 2-14<br />

Adjusting the Gripper Rollers ............................................................. 2-14<br />

Webbing the Print Towers.................................................................. 2-15<br />

Webbing the Dryer ............................................................................. 2-17<br />

Alternative Webbing Routes............................................................... 2-18<br />

Webbing the Turnbar ......................................................................... 2-19<br />

Webbing the Still Picture Unit............................................................. 2-19<br />

Webbing the Rewind Unit................................................................... 2-20<br />

Setting the Units of the Speed Display............................................... 2-22<br />

Selecting the Motor Direction ............................................................. 2-22<br />

Changing a Web Weight Value .......................................................... 2-22<br />

Tightening the Web................................................................................... 2-23<br />

Printhead Activities ................................................................................... 2-24<br />

Raising and Lowering the Cover ........................................................ 2-24<br />

Moving a Printhead to Service Position.............................................. 2-24<br />

Moving a Printhead to Printing Position ............................................. 2-25<br />

Adjusting the Printing Position ........................................................... 2-26<br />

Setting Printhead Height .................................................................... 2-26<br />

Setting Printhead Skew...................................................................... 2-28<br />

Enabling an Existing Printhead .......................................................... 2-29<br />

Disabling an Existing Printhead.......................................................... 2-30<br />

Print Job Operations ....................................................................................... 2-30<br />

Positioning the Cue Sensor ...................................................................... 2-30<br />

Positioning the Web Break Sensor ........................................................... 2-32<br />

Adjusting the Dryer Temperature.............................................................. 2-34<br />

Setting Up a Print Job............................................................................... 2-35<br />

Printing Test Pages .................................................................................. 2-41<br />

Printing a Print Job ................................................................................... 2-42<br />

Adjusting the Data Registration ................................................................ 2-43<br />

Adjusting the Printhead Registration ........................................................ 2-45<br />

Adjusting the Duplexed Registration......................................................... 2-46<br />

Reprinting Data......................................................................................... 2-47<br />

Setting Up Page Correlation ..................................................................... 2-48<br />

Positioning the Page Correlation Sensors ................................................ 2-51<br />

Saving the Job Settings ............................................................................ 2-52<br />

Recovering From an Emergency Stop...................................................... 2-52<br />

Selecting a New Printing Speed ............................................................... 2-53<br />

Turning the Printing System Off................................................................ 2-53<br />

Unwind Unit Operations .................................................................................. 2-58<br />

Setting the Roll End Detection.................................................................. 2-58<br />

Rewind Unit Operations .................................................................................. 2-59<br />

Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads........................................................................................ 3-2<br />

Baseline System Numbering ...................................................................... 3-2<br />

Eight-Rail Numbering.................................................................................. 3-4<br />

Multiple Print Bank Numbering ................................................................... 3-5<br />

Adding a Printhead to the Configuration..................................................... 3-6<br />

Using an MPC Manual Setup ..................................................................... 3-7<br />

Setting Up Printing for the CS300............................................................... 3-8<br />

Setting the Web Tension .......................................................................... 3-16<br />

Zeroing the Printhead Position........................................................................ 3-17<br />

Aligning and Positioning the Web <strong>Guide</strong>......................................................... 3-18<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor ............................................................................... 3-19<br />

Adjusting the Sensitivity............................................................................ 3-19<br />

Setting the Cue Delays ............................................................................. 3-22<br />

Calculating the Speed Comp Value.......................................................... 3-27<br />

Placing the Page Correlation Marks ......................................................... 3-29<br />

Using Special Cueing ............................................................................... 3-30<br />

viii<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Contents<br />

Two Alternatives to Special Cueing ................................................... 3-30<br />

Implementing Special Cueing ............................................................ 3-31<br />

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Controller Messages......................................................................................... 4-1<br />

Printing Machinery Messages........................................................................... 4-4<br />

APU ..................................................................................................... 4-8<br />

Printhead Lateral Error Screen................................................................. 4-14<br />

Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Daily Procedures .............................................................................................. 5-2<br />

Weekly Procedures........................................................................................... 5-2<br />

Print Towers ............................................................................................... 5-2<br />

Perform Print Station Maintenance...................................................... 5-2<br />

Monthly Procedures.......................................................................................... 5-2<br />

Unwind Unit................................................................................................ 5-2<br />

Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit....................................................... 5-2<br />

Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit Shaft Grip Adjust .......................... 5-4<br />

Print Tower Units........................................................................................ 5-5<br />

Supply Grease to the Printhead Worm Gear ....................................... 5-5<br />

Check the Web Cleaner Filters............................................................ 5-6<br />

Clean the Web Cleaner Internal Components ..................................... 5-6<br />

Check the HEPA Filter for Dust ........................................................... 5-7<br />

Rewind Unit................................................................................................ 5-8<br />

Supply Grease to the Rewind Unit....................................................... 5-8<br />

Quarterly Procedures........................................................................................ 5-9<br />

Print Towers ............................................................................................. 5-10<br />

Perform Print Station Maintenance.................................................... 5-10<br />

Replace the HEPA Pre-filters ............................................................ 5-10<br />

Replace the Web Cleaner Pre-filters ................................................. 5-10<br />

Annual Procedures ......................................................................................... 5-11<br />

Appendix A. Metric-English Conversion<br />

Glossary<br />

Index<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

ix


Figures<br />

Figure 1.1 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems modules ................................. 1-1<br />

Figure 1.2 External controls, control box ..................................................... 1-2<br />

Figure 1.3 Transformer ................................................................................ 1-3<br />

Figure 1.4 External controls, compressor .................................................... 1-3<br />

Figure 1.5 Paper loading end, unwind unit .................................................. 1-4<br />

Figure 1.6 Air gun and deflation tool, detail ................................................. 1-5<br />

Figure 1.7 External controls, unwind unit OS............................................... 1-5<br />

Figure 1.8 Internal controls, unwind unit OS................................................ 1-7<br />

Figure 1.9 Web guide and web break sensors, unwind unit interior ............ 1-8<br />

Figure 1.10 Web guide components, unwind unit interior.............................. 1-9<br />

Figure 1.11 Spacer unit.................................................................................. 1-9<br />

Figure 1.12 Web cleaner unit....................................................................... 1-10<br />

Figure 1.13 Internal controls, print tower A, upstream door......................... 1-11<br />

Figure 1.14 Controls, print tower A, OS ....................................................... 1-12<br />

Figure 1.15 Web cleaner, box interior.......................................................... 1-14<br />

Figure 1.16 HEPA filter housing, print tower A ............................................ 1-15<br />

Figure 1.17 Printhead position controls, print tower A ................................. 1-15<br />

Figure 1.18 Controls, print towers B and C.................................................. 1-16<br />

Figure 1.19 Controls, print tower D .............................................................. 1-17<br />

Figure 1.20 Page correlation sensors, print tower D.................................... 1-19<br />

Figure 1.21 Main screen .............................................................................. 1-20<br />

Figure 1.22 APU screen............................................................................... 1-22<br />

Figure 1.23 Web screen............................................................................... 1-23<br />

Figure 1.24 Pull ratio screen........................................................................ 1-24<br />

Figure 1.25 Dryer screen ............................................................................. 1-26<br />

Figure 1.26 Registration screen................................................................... 1-28<br />

Figure 1.27 Error screen.............................................................................. 1-30<br />

Figure 1.28 IJP cover screen ....................................................................... 1-30<br />

Figure 1.29 Dryer error screen..................................................................... 1-30<br />

Figure 1.30 Printhead lateral error screen ................................................... 1-31<br />

Figure 1.31 APU cover screen..................................................................... 1-31<br />

Figure 1.32 APU error screen ...................................................................... 1-31<br />

Figure 1.33 APR cover screen..................................................................... 1-32<br />

Figure 1.34 APR error screen ...................................................................... 1-32<br />

Figure 1.35 External controls, still picture unit OS ....................................... 1-33<br />

Figure 1.36 Internal controls, still picture unit .............................................. 1-34<br />

Figure 1.37 External controls, rewind unit OS ............................................. 1-35<br />

Figure 1.38 Paper unloading end, rewind unit ............................................. 1-35<br />

Figure 1.39 Internal controls, rewind unit..................................................... 1-36<br />

Figure 1.40 Controllers ................................................................................ 1-37<br />

Figure 1.41 Print station and printhead........................................................ 1-38<br />

Figure 2.1 Main switch, transformer............................................................. 2-3<br />

Figure 2.2 Main switches, control box.......................................................... 2-4<br />

Figure 2.3 Air gun and deflation tool, detail ................................................. 2-5<br />

Figure 2.4 Roll released from lowered lift arms ........................................... 2-5<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> xi


Contents<br />

Figure 2.5 Deflating bladder in shaft ............................................................ 2-6<br />

Figure 2.6 Inflating shaft in roll ..................................................................... 2-6<br />

Figure 2.7 Positioning end of roll sensor ...................................................... 2-7<br />

Figure 2.8 Using mandrel lateral adjustment................................................ 2-7<br />

Figure 2.9 Lift arm, rewind unit..................................................................... 2-9<br />

Figure 2.10 Access for inflating shaft bladder ................................................ 2-9<br />

Figure 2.11 Webbing diagram, unwind from top .......................................... 2-10<br />

Figure 2.12 Webbing diagram, unwind from bottom .................................... 2-11<br />

Figure 2.13 Webbing diagram, spacer unit .................................................. 2-11<br />

Figure 2.14 Web guide components, unwind unit interior ............................ 2-12<br />

Figure 2.15 Sensors, web guide................................................................... 2-12<br />

Figure 2.16 Gripper roller adjustment detail ................................................. 2-14<br />

Figure 2.17 Web cleaner box detail.............................................................. 2-15<br />

Figure 2.18 Webbing for simplex 1-up or 2-up ............................................. 2-16<br />

Figure 2.19 Webbing for 1-up or 2-up turned ............................................... 2-16<br />

Figure 2.20 Dryer housing and drum............................................................ 2-17<br />

Figure 2.21 Dryer webbing, single pass ....................................................... 2-17<br />

Figure 2.22 Dryer webbing, double pass...................................................... 2-18<br />

Figure 2.23 Webbing diagram, print tower turnbar detail ............................. 2-19<br />

Figure 2.24 Webbing diagram, still picture unit ............................................ 2-20<br />

Figure 2.25 Webbing diagram, rewind to top ............................................... 2-21<br />

Figure 2.26 Webbing diagram, rewind to bottom ......................................... 2-21<br />

Figure 2.27 Printhead in service position ..................................................... 2-25<br />

Figure 2.28 Printhead position controls........................................................ 2-26<br />

Figure 2.29 Printhead height measurement ................................................. 2-27<br />

Figure 2.30 Printhead position controls, print tower A.................................. 2-28<br />

Figure 2.31 Front cue sensor location, print tower A.................................... 2-30<br />

Figure 2.32 Back cue sensor location, print tower B .................................... 2-31<br />

Figure 2.33 Cue sensor location, still picture unit......................................... 2-31<br />

Figure 2.34 Cue sensors and bracket .......................................................... 2-32<br />

Figure 2.35 Web break sensor locations, unwind unit.................................. 2-32<br />

Figure 2.36 Web break sensor locations, print tower D ............................... 2-33<br />

Figure 2.37 Web break sensor locations, rewind unit .................................. 2-33<br />

Figure 2.38 Web break sensor and bracket ................................................. 2-34<br />

Figure 2.39 Printed area, physical printable and valid printed ..................... 2-36<br />

Figure 2.40 Page correlation sensor location, print tower D ........................ 2-51<br />

Figure 2.41 Main switches, control box ........................................................ 2-57<br />

Figure 2.42 Positioning end of roll sensor .................................................... 2-58<br />

Figure 3.1 Printhead numbering, baseline system ....................................... 3-2<br />

Figure 3.2 Printhead numbering for 2-up, 2-color ........................................ 3-3<br />

Figure 3.3 Webbing and numbering for 1-up; 2-over-2-color ....................... 3-3<br />

Figure 3.4 Webbing and numbering for duplex 4-color ................................ 3-4<br />

Figure 3.5 Webbing and numbering for 2-up 4-color.................................... 3-4<br />

Figure 3.6 Alternative numbering for 2-up 4-color........................................ 3-5<br />

Figure 3.7 Printhead numbering, 12-printhead system ................................ 3-5<br />

Figure 3.8 Printhead numbering, 16-printhead system ................................ 3-6<br />

Figure 3.9 Cut sheet modes ......................................................................... 3-9<br />

Figure 3.10 Pull ratio screen ........................................................................ 3-16<br />

Figure 3.11 Registration screen ................................................................... 3-18<br />

Figure 3.12 Printhead lateral error screen.................................................... 3-18<br />

Figure 3.13 Keyence sensor and amplifier, detail ........................................ 3-19<br />

Figure 3.14 Omron cue sensor, detail .......................................................... 3-20<br />

Figure 3.15 Sick cue sensor, detail .............................................................. 3-21<br />

Figure 3.16 Keyence sensor and amplifier, detail ........................................ 3-22<br />

Figure 3.17 Measuring the print differences for speed compensation ......... 3-29<br />

xii<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Contents<br />

Tables<br />

Figure 3.18 Page correlation marks............................................................. 3-30<br />

Figure 4.1 Application → Messages screen ................................................ 4-2<br />

Figure 4.2 Print screen................................................................................. 4-2<br />

Figure 4.3 Tools → connections screen ...................................................... 4-3<br />

Figure 4.4 Error screen................................................................................ 4-5<br />

Figure 4.5 APU error screen ........................................................................ 4-7<br />

Figure 4.6 APU cover screen....................................................................... 4-8<br />

Figure 4.7 IJP cover screen ....................................................................... 4-10<br />

Figure 4.8 Dryer error screen..................................................................... 4-11<br />

Figure 4.9 Printhead lateral motor error indicator ...................................... 4-12<br />

Figure 4.10 Printhead lateral positioning error indicator .............................. 4-12<br />

Figure 4.11 Printhead OS limit error indicator.............................................. 4-13<br />

Figure 4.12 Printhead OS over limit error indicator...................................... 4-13<br />

Figure 4.13 Printhead OS limit error indicator.............................................. 4-13<br />

Figure 4.14 Printhead GS over limit error indicator...................................... 4-14<br />

Figure 4.15 Printhead GS limit error indicator.............................................. 4-14<br />

Figure 4.16 Printhead lateral error screen ................................................... 4-14<br />

Figure 4.17 APR cover screen..................................................................... 4-15<br />

Figure 4.18 APR error screen ...................................................................... 4-16<br />

Figure 5.1 Grease locations, unwind unit, lift arms ...................................... 5-3<br />

Figure 5.2 Grease locations, unwind unit, OS interior ................................. 5-4<br />

Figure 5.3 Grease locations, worm gear, printhead, print tower .................. 5-5<br />

Figure 5.4 Web cleaner unit......................................................................... 5-6<br />

Figure 5.5 Web guide box, inside print tower A ........................................... 5-7<br />

Figure 5.6 HEPA filter housing, print tower A .............................................. 5-8<br />

Figure 5.7 Grease locations, rewind unit, GS lift arm .................................. 5-8<br />

Figure 5.8 HEPA filter housing, print tower A ............................................ 5-10<br />

Figure 5.9 Pre-filter and mesh filter, web cleaner unit ............................... 5-11<br />

Tables<br />

Table 1.1 Grammage and basis weight conversions for web weight.... 1-24<br />

Table 5.1 Operator maintenance ............................................................ 5-1<br />

Table A.1 Conversion table, fractional inch to mm.................................. A-1<br />

Table A.2 Conversion table, mm to fractional inch.................................. A-2<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

xiii


Chapter 1.<br />

Operator Controls<br />

The KODAK VERSAMARK VX5000 printing system contains the standard<br />

modules shown in Figure 1.1. The following optional modules may be<br />

added to your printing system or replace the rewind unit:<br />

• Processing unit for punching, perforating, or punching and perforating<br />

the paper<br />

• Still picture unit<br />

• Sheeter-stacker unit<br />

• Folding unit.<br />

The printing system has printhead options for higher quality four-color<br />

process printing, designated by the name VX5000e.<br />

For supplying the print job information and data, the printing system<br />

installed in your plant may have a KODAK VERSAMARK CS300 system<br />

controller, a KODAK VERSAMARK CS400 system controller, or a KODAK<br />

VERSAMARK CS600 system controller. The term system controller can<br />

mean any of these products.<br />

Figure 1.1<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems modules<br />

Unwind<br />

unit<br />

Spacer<br />

unit<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

Print towers<br />

D<br />

Spacer<br />

unit<br />

Rewind<br />

unit<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-1


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Control Box Controls<br />

Control Box Controls<br />

The control box has external controls (Figure 1.7). Your printing system<br />

may have a second control box, which has the same external controls.<br />

Figure 1.2<br />

External controls, control box<br />

200-V power switch<br />

400-V power switch<br />

DANGER<br />

Dangerous voltage. Contact may cause electric shock or burn.<br />

200-V power switch<br />

On Off<br />

Switching 200-V power on provides power to the print stations,<br />

controller, unwind unit, print towers, and rewind unit (except for the<br />

rewind motor). Some components of these units include the PLC<br />

hardware, lights, fans, web guides, servo motors, and the powder<br />

brake.<br />

If your printing system has two control boxes, the second control box<br />

200-V power provides power to the same modules for the second set<br />

of print towers.<br />

400-V power switch<br />

On Off<br />

Switching 400-V power on provides power to the motor in the rewind<br />

unit and the dryer in print tower D.<br />

If your printing system has two control boxes, the second control box<br />

400-V power provides power to the dryer in the second print tower D.<br />

1-2 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Transformer Controls<br />

Transformer Controls<br />

The transformer (Figure 1.3) has one external or internal control. Your<br />

printing system may have a similar transformer supplied under special<br />

arrangement, or it may have an additional transformer if your printing<br />

system has a second control box.<br />

Figure 1.3<br />

Transformer<br />

Switch on/off<br />

DANGER<br />

Dangerous voltage. Contact may cause electric shock or burn.<br />

Main switch<br />

On Off<br />

Switching power on provides power to the control box(es) and all<br />

modules in the printing system.<br />

Compressor Controls<br />

Your printing system may include a compressor (Figure 1.4) if pressurized<br />

air is not available in sufficient amount from the facility.<br />

Figure 1.4<br />

External controls, compressor<br />

Air pressure gauge<br />

Temperature gauge<br />

Hours indicator<br />

Main switch on/off<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-3


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Air pressure gauge<br />

Displays the air pressure available to the printing system.<br />

Temperature gauge<br />

Displays the temperature and humidity of the provided air.<br />

Hours indicator<br />

Displays the hours of use for the compressor.<br />

Main switch<br />

On Off<br />

Switching power on provides pressurized air to the unwind unit, print<br />

towers, still picture unit and finishing (rewind unit).<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

The unwind unit has external controls on the paper loading end (Figure<br />

1.5) and operator side (OS, Figure 1.7). The unit also has internal controls<br />

behind the OS doors (Figure 1.8) and the sliding panel (downstream end,<br />

Figure 1.9). In addition to these controls, some screens of the operator<br />

display at print tower D provide control of the unwind unit. See “Operator<br />

Display, Print Tower D” on page 1-19 for more information.<br />

External Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Operators load paper rolls at the unwind unit. Figure 1.5 shows the<br />

components used for this activity.<br />

Figure 1.5<br />

Paper loading end, unwind unit<br />

Roll end sensor<br />

Shaft<br />

Lift arms<br />

Access panels<br />

Air gun<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from moving paper roll. Stand back from the lift arms<br />

and paper roll during operation.<br />

Access panels<br />

Allow clearance for raising and lowering the lift arms.<br />

1-4 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Lift arms<br />

Hold a roll of paper in place while printing and bring a roll up or down<br />

for changing paper.<br />

Shaft (mandrel)<br />

Holds a roll of paper in place between the lift arms. Several shaft<br />

diameters are available, as needed for different sizes of paper cores.<br />

The shaft is not driven for web movement. Instead, the web is driven<br />

by gripper rollers, and this shaft is braked to avoid loose paper<br />

tension.<br />

Roll end sensor<br />

Allows detection of the end of paper on a roll in advance of emptying<br />

the core. The sensor can be positioned to allow more or less unused<br />

paper on the roll.<br />

Air gun<br />

Provides pressurized air for inflating the unwind shaft (Figure 1.6) and<br />

a deflation tool to press the nipple on the shaft and bleed air. In<br />

version 1 and version 2 machines, the air gun and inflation tool are<br />

parts of the same tool. In version 3 machines, separate tools are<br />

provided.<br />

Figure 1.6<br />

Air gun and deflation tool, detail<br />

Versions 1, 2 Version 3<br />

Deflation tool<br />

Air gun<br />

Figure 1.7<br />

External controls, unwind unit OS<br />

Shaft Brake Roll end Emergency Ready<br />

down/n/up off/on off/on<br />

stop<br />

Stop<br />

Jog<br />

Run slow<br />

Alarm<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-5


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from moving paper roll. Stand back from the lift arms<br />

and paper roll during operation.<br />

Shaft<br />

Down N Up<br />

DOWN brings the lift arms down to change paper rolls, N keeps the lift<br />

arms from raising or lowering, and UP brings the lift arms up to load<br />

paper for printing. Whenever the control is released, it immediately<br />

returns to the N position.<br />

Brake<br />

Off On<br />

OFF disengages the powder brake to allow free paper movement, and<br />

ON engages the brake to control paper movement.<br />

Roll End<br />

Off On<br />

OFF disables the sensing of when the roll is nearly empty. ON enables<br />

the sensing of the end of the roll, and a nearly empty roll may cause<br />

the printing system to stop.<br />

This switch must be on before any selections made at the Operator<br />

display are used for roll end function.<br />

Emergency stop<br />

Pressing EMERGENCY STOP causes the following actions:<br />

• Stops printing, if an operating controller is connected to the<br />

printing system and print stations<br />

• Stops web movement immediately<br />

• Causes all EMERGENCY STOP buttons to blink on and off<br />

• Sends a shutdown command to the dryer(s)<br />

• Turns off power to the dryer blower(s).<br />

Note: The quick web stop may cause web breaks. Do not use EMERGENCY STOP<br />

to stop the printing system under normal conditions.<br />

The button latches in position after it is pressed. To release, turn the<br />

knob and allow it to release. Refer to “Recovering From an<br />

Emergency Stop” on page 2-52 for more information.<br />

Stop<br />

Select STOP to stop printing and web movement.<br />

When the controller is operating the printing system, the controller<br />

determines the actions and timing of a stop. If the printing system is<br />

not connected to an operating controller, after a wait of 2 seconds, the<br />

printing system PLC(s) will execute a controlled stop.<br />

Ready<br />

Sounds an alarm for 2 seconds, and allows selecting JOG, RUN SLOW,<br />

or RUN FAST during that period.<br />

Jog<br />

Moves the web as long as you press the button. To start jogging, you<br />

must hold the button until after the alarm stops, and then press the<br />

button again to start web movement. Jogging can occur while errors<br />

are active. Jog speed is selected by your service person.<br />

1-6 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Run slow<br />

Moves the web as long as no errors are active, if the brake is on and<br />

the shafts are up. The speed used for Run slow operation is selected<br />

by your service person.<br />

Alarm<br />

Produces a warning sound after READY has been pressed.<br />

Internal Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Inside the OS doors of the unwind unit (Figure 1.8) are controls for the<br />

decurler (not implemented as of publication date), web guide, web<br />

tension, and shaft position. Inside the sliding door at the downstream end<br />

(Figure 1.9) are an interlock switch and sensors for the web guide and<br />

web break. Under the glass door on top (Figure 1.10) are the web guide<br />

components.<br />

Figure 1.8<br />

Internal controls, unwind unit OS<br />

Tension controller<br />

Web guide controller<br />

Mandrel lateral adjust<br />

Air pressure gauge<br />

Tension controller<br />

Modifies how tension is maintained throughout the printing system.<br />

Refer to the manufacturer’s documents for further information. The<br />

tension controller in your printing system may look different from the<br />

one shown here.<br />

Web guide controller<br />

Sets up and operates the web guide sensing. Refer to the<br />

manufacturer’s documents for further information.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-7


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Unwind Unit Controls<br />

Mandrel lateral adjust<br />

Positions the shaft and roll up to 2 inches (5 cm) forward and back<br />

between GS and OS.<br />

Air pressure gauge<br />

Shows the current air pressure available at the mandrel cylinders.<br />

Web guide sensor position<br />

Moves both edge sensors closer or further apart as a fine adjustment.<br />

(One or two edge sensors may be on your printing system.)<br />

Figure 1.9<br />

Web guide and web break sensors, unwind unit interior<br />

Web guide<br />

Interlock<br />

Web guide sensors<br />

Sliding door (open)<br />

Web break sensor<br />

Interlock<br />

Disables all RUN SLOW and RUN FAST controls while the top door is<br />

open.<br />

Web guide sensors<br />

Sense the GS and OS edges of the web and provide the information<br />

to the web guide controller. Most printing systems have a web guide<br />

sensor at both the GS and OS edges. Some early printing systems<br />

may have a single web guide sensor at the GS of the web.<br />

Web break sensor<br />

Senses when paper is not webbed through this part of the module.<br />

1-8 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Spacer Unit Controls<br />

Figure 1.10<br />

Web guide components, unwind unit interior<br />

Interlock<br />

Web guide sensor<br />

Web guide roller<br />

Interlock<br />

Disables all RUN SLOW and RUN FAST controls while the door is open.<br />

Web guide sensors<br />

Sense the OS and GS edges of the web and provide the information<br />

to the web guide controller. Most printing systems have a web guide<br />

sensor at both the GS and OS edges. Some early printing systems<br />

may have a single web guide sensor at the GS of the web.<br />

Web guide rollers<br />

As necessary to keep the web correctly positioned, these rollers<br />

move in various directions.<br />

Spacer Unit Controls<br />

A spacer unit (Figure 1.11) usually separates a set of print towers from<br />

modules that supply paper to the print towers. The spacer allows your<br />

crossing easily from the OS area to the GS area, and it includes a gripper<br />

roller for effective paper movement.<br />

Figure 1.11<br />

Spacer unit<br />

Door (open)<br />

Interlock<br />

Gripper rollers<br />

Interlock<br />

Disables all RUN SLOW and RUN FAST controls while the door is open.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-9


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Web Cleaner Controls<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of pinching from rollers. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

rollers.<br />

Gripper rollers<br />

Pull the web at a controlled tension from the previous module (in this<br />

case, the unwind unit) and supply web to the next module. The<br />

gripper rollers are opened and closed with GRIPPER WHEEL OFF/ON in<br />

print tower A.<br />

Web Cleaner Controls<br />

At the first bank of print towers, a web cleaner usually stands behind the<br />

spacer unit. The web cleaner placement allows its flexible hoses to<br />

connect to additional components inside Print Tower A. These<br />

components brush dust and particles from the web as it moves into the<br />

Print Tower, and the free-standing module vacuums the foreign matter to<br />

its filters.<br />

The two filters in the free-standing module must be replaced regularly.<br />

Refer to “Replace the Web Cleaner Pre-filters” on page 5-10.<br />

Components inside the print tower must be cleaned regularly. Refer to<br />

“Clean the Web Cleaner Internal Components” on page 5-6.<br />

Figure 1.12<br />

Web cleaner unit<br />

Lid (closed)<br />

Main power<br />

Print tower A<br />

On-Off switch<br />

Lid<br />

Allows access to filters.<br />

Main power<br />

Provides input voltage to the vacuum motor.<br />

On/Off switch<br />

Controls the vacuum motor.<br />

Brush and vacuum assembly<br />

Inside Print Tower A, dislodges and removes dust and foreign objects<br />

from the web.<br />

1-10 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Your printing system may have two to eight print towers, and each print<br />

tower may include one or two printheads, and in some cases no<br />

printheads, depending on the options installed. There are four different<br />

print towers. Every printing system has at least one Print Tower A and one<br />

Print Tower D. Two print towers are optional: Print Tower B and Print<br />

Tower C.<br />

Print Tower A Controls<br />

Print Tower A has internal controls behind the upstream sliding door<br />

(Figure 1.13) and OS doors (Figure 1.14). The tower holds printheads 1A<br />

and 1B (or 1 and 2) in place over the web. More complex printing systems<br />

may have more complex numbering for printheads, as discussed in<br />

“Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2. Above the OS doors is one external<br />

control. Printhead position controls are at hand when the cover is raised<br />

and the printheads are in service position (Figure 1.17).<br />

Figure 1.13<br />

Internal controls, print tower A, upstream door<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Interlock<br />

Web guide sensors<br />

Web guide<br />

Web cleaner box<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Controls the timing of printing the next document.<br />

Interlock<br />

Disables all RUN SLOW and RUN FAST controls while the door is open.<br />

Web guide sensors<br />

Sense the OS edge and GS edge of the web and provide the<br />

information to the web guide controller. Your printing system may<br />

have one or two sensors. Most printing systems have a web guide<br />

sensor at both the GS and OS edges. Some early printing systems<br />

may have a single web guide sensor at the GS of the web.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-11


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Web guide<br />

Maintains straightness of the web and prevents crossweb paper<br />

movement.<br />

Web cleaner box<br />

Removes dust and other particles from the web.<br />

Figure 1.14<br />

Controls, print tower A, OS<br />

Cover up/down<br />

Web guide controller (option)<br />

Cue sensor position (option)<br />

Cue sensor (option)<br />

Air gun<br />

Stop Jog<br />

Ready Web tension<br />

infeed outfeed<br />

Gripper roller off/on<br />

(spacer)<br />

Gripper roller off/on<br />

(turnbar)<br />

Gripper wheel pressure<br />

(spacer)<br />

Gripper wheel pressure<br />

(turnbar)<br />

Interlock<br />

Cover up/down<br />

Raises and lowers the print tower cover. While lowering, alternating<br />

tones warn that the cover is moving. If a printhead interface may be<br />

hit by the moving cover, a warning of four short beeps sounds, and a<br />

message is displayed on the operator display.<br />

Stop<br />

Ready<br />

Jog<br />

This group of buttons is described in “External Unwind Unit Controls”<br />

on page 1-4. This group includes the only STOP button that may be<br />

hidden from view during normal operation.<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Controls the timing of printing the next document. This sensor,<br />

located downstream from the turnbar, reads cue marks for printing on<br />

the reverse side of the web, in duplex printing.<br />

1-12 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Cue sensor position<br />

Positions the cue sensor placed after the turnbar. One or more cue<br />

sensors may be installed in the area below the printheads, and a cue<br />

sensor after the turnbar senses the location for printing on the reverse<br />

side of a duplex job. Additional information is available at “Positioning<br />

the Cue Sensor” on page 2-30.<br />

Web tension<br />

Infeed<br />

Moves the gripper rollers in the upstream spacer unit to feed web into<br />

print tower A. The web tension is raised for modules upstream from<br />

the spacer and lowered downstream from the spacer.<br />

Both INFEED WEB TENSION and OUTFEED WEB TENSION move the web<br />

and operate the gripper rollers.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of entangling. Keep hands and loose clothing away during<br />

operation.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of cuts from moving paper. Keep hands away from moving web.<br />

Web tension<br />

Outfeed<br />

Moves the gripper rollers in the downstream portion of print tower D<br />

to feed web into print towers B, C, and D. The web tension is raised in<br />

all print towers in the same bank.<br />

Gripper wheel<br />

Off On<br />

Controls the gripper rollers in the upstream spacer unit.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of pinching from rollers. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

rollers.<br />

Gripper wheel<br />

Off On<br />

Controls the gripper rollers at the turnbar.<br />

Gripper wheel pressure<br />

Controls air pressure for the gripper rollers in the upstream spacer<br />

unit.<br />

Gripper wheel pressure<br />

Controls air pressure for the gripper rollers at the turnbar.<br />

Interlock<br />

Disables all RUN SLOW and RUN FAST controls while the door is open.<br />

Web cleaner box<br />

Removes paper dust, chad, and foreign particles from the web. The<br />

box has the following internal components.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-13


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Figure 1.15<br />

Web cleaner, box interior<br />

Spacer unit, upstream<br />

Air duct<br />

Agitator<br />

brushes<br />

Vacuum tube<br />

Antistatic bar<br />

Agitator brushes<br />

Remove dust, chad, and foreign objects from the web as it passes<br />

between brushes.<br />

Antistatic bar<br />

Neutralizes any static charges built up by the contact between the<br />

brushes and the web.<br />

Air duct<br />

Suctions loosened matter from the web cleaner to the filters.<br />

Vacuum tube<br />

Carries loosened matter to the air duct.<br />

HEPA Filters<br />

On top of each print tower is a specialized housing for air filtration. The<br />

fans in the housing operate automatically when printing, and the filtration<br />

aids in printhead life and reliability. Inside the housing are two filters that<br />

must be changed regularly. The prefilter, accessible from the top, must be<br />

changed by operators. The HEPA (High efficiency particle air) filter,<br />

accessible from inside the print tower, must be changed by a service<br />

person.<br />

Note: In printing systems with the HEPA filter, a warning occurs if printing is run<br />

at a speed greater than 75 fpm (22 mpm) with the hoods open. If the<br />

warning exists for seven minutes, an error will occur and printing will stop.<br />

1-14 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Figure 1.16<br />

HEPA filter housing, print tower A<br />

Prefilter and grill<br />

On/Off switch<br />

Grill<br />

Holds the prefilter in position.<br />

Prefilter<br />

Removes the largest dust and particles from air provided to the<br />

interior of the print tower.<br />

On/Off switch<br />

Controls the air fan inside the housing.<br />

Printhead Position Controls<br />

Several knobs and screws adjust the printhead to its print position, which<br />

is over the web and in relation to the desired print location on the web.<br />

Additional information is available at “Setting Printhead Height” on page<br />

2-26 and “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45.<br />

Figure 1.17<br />

Printhead position controls, print tower A<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Set lever<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Skew adjust knob<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-15


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Height adjust knobs<br />

Optimum printhead height is 0.075 to 0.10 inch (1.90 to 2.54 mm)<br />

above the web. Measure the height with a feeler gauge.<br />

Set lever<br />

Sets the height and skew adjustments made with the knobs and<br />

prevents additional changes by turning the knobs.<br />

Printhead angle<br />

Screws at the OS and GS ends of the printhead bottom can adjust the<br />

printhead height to be parallel to the roller.<br />

Skew adjust knob<br />

Knob at the OS end of the printhead can adjust the print array<br />

horizontal position to be parallel to the roller at zero skew.<br />

Control of the printhead crossweb position is through the Operator display<br />

(see “Registration Screen—Printhead Position Control” on page 1-28).<br />

Refer to “Moving a Printhead to Service Position” on page 2-24 and<br />

“Moving a Printhead to Printing Position” on page 2-25 for setting the<br />

crossweb positions. Refer to the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for information on the effect on printing with the printhead height<br />

and skew adjustments.<br />

Print Towers B and C Controls<br />

Print towers B and C (Figure 1.18) hold printheads 2A and 2B (or 3 and 4)<br />

in tower B and printhead 3A and 3B (or 5 and 6) in place over the web, in<br />

a system with four print towers and eight printheads. More complex<br />

printing systems may have more complex numbering for printheads, as<br />

discussed in “Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2. The web passes<br />

underneath printhead 1 first. If a print tower is added, the identities of the<br />

printheads may change, depending on settings in the controller and for<br />

the printing network. For more information on numbering, refer to<br />

“Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2.<br />

Figure 1.18<br />

Controls, print towers B and C<br />

Print tower B<br />

Print tower C<br />

Cover up/down<br />

Cue sensor (option)<br />

Gripper roller<br />

Gripper wheel off/on<br />

Gripper pressure<br />

1-16 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Cover up/down<br />

Raises and lowers the print tower cover. While lowering, alternating<br />

tones warn that the cover is moving. If a printhead interface may be<br />

hit by the moving cover, a warning of four short beeps sounds, and a<br />

message is displayed on the operator display.<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Controls the timing of printing the next document. This sensor reads<br />

cue marks for printing on the reverse side of the web, in duplex<br />

printing.<br />

Cue sensor position<br />

One or more cue sensors may be installed in the area below the<br />

printheads. Additional information is available at “Positioning the Cue<br />

Sensor” on page 2-30.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of pinching from rollers. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

rollers.<br />

Gripper wheel<br />

Off On<br />

Controls the gripper rollers in print tower C. These rollers are used<br />

only in duplex 1-up jobs, in which the web is routed from the dryer to<br />

the turnbar.<br />

Gripper pressure<br />

Controls the amount of air pressure supplied to the gripper rollers.<br />

Print Tower D Controls<br />

Print tower D has the following controls as shown in Figure 1.19, and<br />

holds printheads 4A and 4B (or 7 and 8) in place over the web in a system<br />

with four print towers and eight printheads. More complex printing<br />

systems may have more complex numbering for printheads, as discussed<br />

in “Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2.<br />

Figure 1.19<br />

Controls, print tower D<br />

Cover up<br />

Emergency stop<br />

Operator display<br />

Alarm<br />

Emerg. reset<br />

Operator key<br />

Gripper wheel off / on<br />

Gripper pressure<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-17


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Cover up/down<br />

Raises and lowers the print tower cover. While lowering, alternating<br />

tones warn that the cover is moving. If a printhead interface may be<br />

hit by the moving cover, a warning of four short beeps sounds, and a<br />

message is displayed on the operator display.<br />

Emergency stop<br />

Operation described at “Emergency stop” on page 1-6.<br />

Operator display<br />

Provides software control of the unwind unit, processing unit, and<br />

print towers, as described in “Operator Display, Print Tower D” on<br />

page 1-19.<br />

Alarm<br />

Produces a warning sound after READY has been pressed.<br />

Operator key<br />

Disables or enables normal printing speeds and interlocks on<br />

operator doors.<br />

• On: RUN SLOW and RUN FAST are disabled; open OS doors,<br />

sliding doors, and top covers do not cause an emergency stop.<br />

The JOG indicator lights on the Main screen, Operator display at<br />

print tower D.<br />

• Off: All running speeds are enabled; open doors cause an<br />

emergency stop and disable printing.<br />

Emerg. reset<br />

Resets the printing system after an error has caused a stop or after<br />

EMERGENCY STOP has been pressed.<br />

Cue sensor position (optional)<br />

One or more cue sensors may be installed in the area below the<br />

printheads. Additional information is available at “Positioning the Cue<br />

Sensor” on page 2-30.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of pinching from rollers. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

rollers.<br />

Gripper wheel<br />

Off On<br />

Controls the gripper rollers in print tower D.<br />

Note: The location of the gripper rollers controlled here varies in the<br />

printing systems with two banks of print towers. The control in the<br />

first print tower D controls the gripper rollers in this first print tower<br />

D; and the control in the second print tower D controls the gripper<br />

rollers in the downstream spacer unit.<br />

Gripper pressure<br />

Controls the amount of air pressure supplied to the gripper rollers.<br />

1-18 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Figure 1.20<br />

Page correlation sensors, print tower D<br />

Knobs<br />

Page corr. sensors<br />

for front<br />

Knobs<br />

Sensor amplifiers<br />

Page corr. sensors<br />

for back<br />

The page correlation components normally are located inside print tower<br />

D. However, installations with finishing equipment for printing additional<br />

data, such as magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) encoding, may<br />

have the components at other locations.<br />

Page correlation sensors<br />

Detect correlation marks printed on the documents. Two sensors are<br />

above the web, and two below the web to sense marks on the front<br />

and back, GS and OS pages.<br />

Knobs<br />

Place a sensor over or below the correlation marks printed on the<br />

documents.<br />

Sensor amplifiers<br />

Adjust the sensitivity to marks printed on the documents.<br />

Operator Display, Print Tower D<br />

The operator display is conveniently placed at the OS of print tower D.<br />

The display allows control of the unwind unit, processing unit, and print<br />

towers. Some controls enable other operator displays at the sheeterstacker<br />

unit and folding unit to control the printing system temporarily.<br />

Main Screen—Printing Speed Control<br />

The Main screen automatically displays when the printing system<br />

software is ready for operation or after pressing MAIN in the screen<br />

selection column (Figure 1.21).<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-19


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Figure 1.21<br />

Main screen<br />

Screen selection column<br />

Screen Selection Column Five controls in the screen selection<br />

column allow control of major printing functions:<br />

Registration<br />

Displays a screen for selecting the print position of the printheads<br />

(see “Registration Screen—Printhead Position Control” on page 1-<br />

28).<br />

Dryer<br />

Displays a screen for selecting dryer temperature (see “Dryer<br />

Screen—Temperature Control” on page 1-26).<br />

Web<br />

Displays a screen for selecting paper weight and web tension (see<br />

“Web Screen—Tension Control” on page 1-23).<br />

APU<br />

Displays a screen for controlling the unwind unit (see “APU Screen—<br />

Unwind Control” on page 1-22).<br />

Main<br />

Displays the Main screen.<br />

Main Control Area The following controls provide control of speed<br />

and data for printing.<br />

Jog<br />

Indicates position of the OPERATOR KEY by its color:<br />

• Red: The key is on, and RUN SLOW and RUN FAST are disabled;<br />

open OS doors, sliding doors, and top covers do not cause an<br />

emergency stop.<br />

• Background color: The key is off, and all running speeds are<br />

enabled; open doors cause an emergency stop and disable<br />

printing.<br />

APR<br />

Selects a finishing option, if the button is pressed for more than three<br />

seconds. The control indicates the enabled finishing option by its text:<br />

• APR: rewind unit (maximum speed 1000 fpm, 300 mpm)<br />

• MAPZ: folding unit (maximum speed 750 fpm, 225 mpm)<br />

• APS: sheeter-stacker unit (maximum speed 500 fpm, 150 mpm).<br />

Note: If you select a finishing option that is not installed, errors will occur.<br />

The errors will clear if you select another option that is installed.<br />

1-20 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Speed mpm (fpm)<br />

Indicates the current speed of the printing system. To change the<br />

speed displayed to feet per minute (fpm) or meters per minute (mpm),<br />

see “Setting the Units of the Speed Display” on page 2-22.<br />

Dryer<br />

Displays the dryer status (Ready, Standby, Shutdown, or Alloff).<br />

VST state<br />

Indicates the enabled speed control:<br />

• Online: Data availability to the DC300 actively controls the<br />

transport, dryer, and printing speed, depending on the data that is<br />

available to print.<br />

• Offline: Constant speed control by the SC400, SC600 or SC220.<br />

Web break<br />

Enables or disables the web break sensors throughout the printing<br />

system. When enabled, a web break will cause an error indication<br />

and a fast stop. When disabled, a web break causes no error or stop,<br />

which can be useful while webbing the printing system.<br />

Speed Selection Block The following 18 buttons control the web<br />

speed.<br />

Job speed buttons (up to 16 preset speeds)<br />

Increases or decreases speed to the button pushed, except as limited<br />

by the type of printhead used or the finishing option.<br />

Job speed buttons (2 arrows)<br />

Increases or decreases speed while the button is pushed.<br />

Print Control Block The following 8 buttons control printing the job.<br />

Normal stop<br />

Stops printing in an ordered fashion by completing the printing of all<br />

documents that have already started printing.<br />

If the button is grayed out, the connection to a controller is not active,<br />

and IMAGE TEST and IMAGE DATA are disabled.<br />

Note: This function is not currently implemented as described.<br />

Image test<br />

Selects a file for printing that can be used to set registration<br />

consistently and to check for printing defects.<br />

Image data<br />

Selects the current job file for printing. Selecting among possible job<br />

files is done at the system controller or data host. Refer to the<br />

appropriate operator’s guide for additional information.<br />

The following criteria must be met before IMAGE DATA can result in<br />

printing:<br />

• The system controller must be running.<br />

• A job must be properly loaded. Using the SC400, SC600 or<br />

SC220, a job must be selected, and a starting document number<br />

must be set. Using the CD300, a job must be queued from the<br />

host computer to the KODAK VERSAMARK Printing System.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-21


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Fast stop<br />

Slows and stops web movement in the printing system.<br />

• When the button is lit red, the printing system is not ready for<br />

printing or an EMERGENCY STOP button is locked. Pressing the<br />

button may clear the condition.<br />

• A red bar beside the button indicates a Stop condition has<br />

occurred in print tower A. The stop button in print tower A is<br />

hidden from view, behind the right front door.<br />

• When the button is flashing, the stop condition is locked in.<br />

• When the button is not lit, all printing operations can continue.<br />

Ready<br />

Sounds an alarm, prepares the printing system to move the web, and<br />

enables JOG, RUN SLOW, and RUN FAST for 5 seconds.<br />

Jog<br />

Enabled within 5 seconds after pressing READY, pressing this button<br />

and keeping it pressed sounds an alarm and moves the web at jog<br />

speed. Releasing the button stops web movement.<br />

Run slow<br />

Enabled within 5 seconds after pressing READY, pressing this button<br />

moves the web at a preset, slow speed.<br />

Run fast<br />

Enabled within 5 seconds after pressing READY, pressing this button<br />

moves the web at the last speed selected with the job speed buttons.<br />

APU Screen—Unwind Control<br />

The APU screen displays after pressing APU in the screen selection<br />

column. Use this screen to select how the printing system responds to an<br />

empty roll in the unwind unit and to a seam detected in the middle of a<br />

roll.<br />

Figure 1.22<br />

APU screen<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen.<br />

Processing Unit Control Block Eight controls in the screen<br />

selection column allow control of processing unit functions. If a<br />

processing unit is not installed, the controls have no function.<br />

APU<br />

Displays the APU screen (“APU Screen—Unwind Control” on page 1-<br />

22).<br />

Note: The MS900 is the software that controls the processing unit.<br />

1-22 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Roll End Block If ROLLEND ON is selected at the unwind unit, the<br />

following selections determine how the printing system responds after<br />

sensing the end of a roll.<br />

Stop<br />

Printing performs a fast stop.<br />

Run slow<br />

Printing slows to the run slow speed.<br />

Skip<br />

Printing continues without an indication that the roll is nearly empty.<br />

Web Seam Block If the seam detection option has been purchased<br />

and a seam is detected, the following selection determines how the<br />

printing system responds.<br />

Stop<br />

Printing performs a fast stop.<br />

Run slow<br />

Printing slows to the run slow speed.<br />

Skip<br />

Printing continues without an indication that a seam has been<br />

detected.<br />

Fast stop<br />

Ready<br />

Jog<br />

Run slow<br />

Run fast<br />

Refer to “Print Control Block” on page 1-21 for description of the web<br />

movement controls.<br />

Web Screen—Tension Control<br />

The Web screen displays after pressing WEB in the screen selection<br />

column or after pressing WEB WEIGHT in the Pull ratio screen. Use the<br />

screen to select the weight of the paper.<br />

Figure 1.23<br />

Web screen<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-23


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Web weight g/m 2 [9 buttons]<br />

Selects a paper weight for the current web and provides a standard<br />

set of pull ratios for each gripper roller. You change one or more pull<br />

ratios for the selected web weight; see “Pull Ratio Screen—Gripper<br />

Roller Control” on page 1-24. Only the grammage values in Table 1.1<br />

are valid.<br />

Table 1.1<br />

Grammage and basis weight conversions for web weight<br />

Grammage Bond Cover Newsprint Offset, book, text<br />

46.5 g / 2 cm<br />

12.3 # 17.2 # 28.5 # 31.3 #<br />

52.3 g / 2 cm<br />

13.9 # 19.3 # 32.1 # 35.3 #<br />

64.0 g / 2 cm<br />

17.0 # 23.6 # 39.2 # 43.2 #<br />

81.4 g / 2 cm<br />

21.6 # 30.1 # 49.9 # 54.9 #<br />

104.7 g / 2 cm<br />

27.8 # 38.7 # 64.2 # 70.6 #<br />

127.3 g / 2 cm<br />

33.8 # 47.1 # 78.1 # 85.9 #<br />

157.0 g / 2 cm<br />

41.7 # 58.0 # 96.3 # 105.9 #<br />

Web weight<br />

Selects the Web weight screen.<br />

Pull ratio<br />

Selects the Pull ratio screen.<br />

Pull Ratio Screen—Gripper Roller Control<br />

The Pull ratio screen (Figure 1.24) displays after pressing PULL RATIO in<br />

the Web screen. Use the screen to alter the tension applied to the web<br />

throughout the printing system.<br />

Figure 1.24<br />

Pull ratio screen<br />

Note: The screen displayed for your printing system may have small differences<br />

in the names of controls.<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen.<br />

1-24 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Pull Ratio Block The following buttons provide control for all possible<br />

configurations of printing system options. The buttons are always<br />

displayed, although the options may not be installed.<br />

While running the printing system with RUN FAST, select a gripper roller<br />

identified in the Pull ratio block, and then alter its pull ratio with the<br />

Numeric control block.<br />

Punch (optional module)<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the processing unit, an optional<br />

component.<br />

Infeed 1<br />

Infeed S<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the first Spacer unit.<br />

D-Outfeed 1<br />

D-Outfeed S<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the first print tower C. When the printing<br />

system is webbed for duplex, the gripper rollers pull the web routed<br />

closest to OS.<br />

Turn-bar S<br />

Selects the gripper rollers at the turnbar in print tower A.<br />

Outfeed 1<br />

Outfeed S<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the Spacer unit between the dryer and<br />

the finishing option or, in printing systems with two banks of print<br />

towers, between the first and second banks of print towers. When the<br />

printing system is webbed for duplex, the gripper rollers pull the web<br />

routed closest to GS.<br />

Turn-bar 2 (optional module)<br />

Turn-bar M<br />

Selects the gripper rollers at the turnbar in print tower A.<br />

D-Outfeed 2 (optional module)<br />

D-Outfeed M<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the second print tower C.<br />

Outfeed 2 (optional module)<br />

Outfeed M<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the Spacer unit after the second print<br />

tower D.<br />

APS pull (optional module)<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the infeed of the sheeter-stacker unit.<br />

MAPZ pull (optional module)<br />

Selects the gripper rollers in the infeed of the folding unit.<br />

Option 1<br />

Option 2<br />

Indicates that optional modules are not installed.<br />

Numeric Control Block While running the printing system with RUN<br />

FAST, use any of the following buttons to increase or decrease the pull<br />

ratio of a selected gripper roller, and then press ENTER to complete the<br />

action. The change to the pull ratio is measured in percentage of the<br />

standard pull, from -0.99% through +0.99%.<br />

Note: Low web tension may cause problems in registration. High web tension<br />

may cause frequent web breaks.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-25


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

+ 0 [.] 0 0<br />

Displays your entry for the percentage change to the pull ratio.<br />

+ - paired buttons<br />

Determines whether your entry increases or decreases the pull ratio.<br />

Arrow paired buttons<br />

Increases or decreases the pull ratio by 0.10% (left buttons) or 0.01%<br />

(right buttons) with each press of an arrow button.<br />

Enter<br />

Applies the change in pull ratio.<br />

Web weight<br />

Selects the Web weight screen.<br />

Pull ratio<br />

Selects the Pull ratio screen.<br />

Dryer Screen—Temperature Control<br />

The Dryer screen displays after pressing DRYER in the screen selection<br />

column. Use the screen to select how the dryer functions.<br />

• The dryer has 2 zones for heating the drum, which can be used<br />

separately or together. The zones are the OS and GS portions of the<br />

dryer.<br />

• The dryer has 2 thermostats and 2 sensors, one each in each heating<br />

zone.<br />

• The dryer has 6 air heaters staggered around the drum and 3 heating<br />

elements for each air heater (18 total).<br />

• The dryer has 1 sensor in each air heater (6 total) for checking the<br />

temperature of heated air.<br />

Figure 1.25<br />

Dryer screen<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen. Refer to “Adjusting the Dryer<br />

Temperature” on page 2-34 for procedures in using these controls.<br />

DANGER<br />

Do not touch the dryer covers or drum while the status is Ready, Standby,<br />

or Shutdown. Danger of burns.<br />

1-26 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Dryer status<br />

Indicates one of five possible statuses:<br />

• Off when power is off and the drum is cold<br />

• Stand-by when power is on and the goal temperature has not<br />

been reached<br />

• Ready when the goal temperature has been reached<br />

• Shutdown when power is off and the drum is being cooled<br />

• Error when a problem prevents dryer operation.<br />

Drum temp<br />

Indicates the temperature goal for the dryer drum, in units that were<br />

set during installation of the printing system (degrees Celsius or<br />

Fahrenheit). Select the right button to change the temperature goal<br />

with the arrow buttons. The temperature may be set to any number<br />

from 0 to 140.<br />

Air temp<br />

Indicates and changes the temperature goal for the dryer exhaust, in<br />

units that were set during installation of the printing system (degrees<br />

Celsius or Fahrenheit). Select the right button to change the<br />

temperature goal with the arrow buttons. The temperature may be set<br />

to any number from 0 to 140.<br />

Drum<br />

Indicates and changes the portions of the dryer used: OS half-drum,<br />

GS half-drum, or OS+GS full-drum. Select the right button to display<br />

the options.<br />

Air<br />

Indicates the air heaters selected: from 2 to 6 heaters may be used.<br />

Select the right button to change the options.<br />

Web<br />

Displays the current paper weight selected.<br />

On<br />

Off<br />

Supplies power to the dryer, and warms the dryer to the drum<br />

temperature. The displayed status is “Stand-by” until that temperature<br />

is reached, and then the status is “Ready.”<br />

Turns off power to the dryer. The displayed status is “Shutdown” until<br />

the dryer has cooled, and then the status is “Off.”<br />

Drum OS temp<br />

Displays the current temperature of the OS half of the dryer drum.<br />

Drum GS temp<br />

Displays the current temperature of the GS half of the dryer drum.<br />

Air [number] temp<br />

Displays the current temperature of the air heaters.<br />

Stand-by temp<br />

Displays the current temperature goal when the dryer is in stand-by<br />

mode.<br />

Corrected temp<br />

Displays the amount of additional temperature used at 500 fpm.<br />

Additional heating is provided in proportion to the printing speed.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-27


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Arrow buttons<br />

Increase or decrease the goal temperature of the selected drum or<br />

exhaust.<br />

Error<br />

Displays the Dryer error screen. See “Dryer Error Screen” on page 4-<br />

11.<br />

Registration Screen—Printhead Position Control<br />

The Registration screen displays after pressing REGISTRATION in the<br />

screen selection column. Use this screen to move printheads in the<br />

crossweb direction. To move the printing from one or more printheads in<br />

the direction of web movement, refer to discussion of “cue delay,”<br />

“registration,” or “y position” in operator documents or online help for the<br />

controller.<br />

Figure 1.26<br />

Registration screen<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen. See “Moving a Printhead to<br />

Service Position” on page 2-24 and “Moving a Printhead to Printing<br />

Position” on page 2-25 for procedures in using these controls.<br />

Printhead Block The controls in this block allow you to select a<br />

printhead for movement. The printhead names 1A, 1B, 2A, and so on may<br />

be different on the display for your printing system. The names are set by<br />

the installers of the printing system.<br />

1A 2A 3A 4A<br />

1B 2B 3B 4B<br />

Allows selection of one or more printheads for movement. Printhead<br />

1A is usually the first GS printhead to print and printhead 1B is usually<br />

the first OS printhead to print, depending on settings in the system<br />

controller.<br />

Home (8 small buttons)<br />

When lit, indicates the printhead is in service position.<br />

Home<br />

Selects printhead movement to the service position.<br />

Return<br />

Selects printhead movement from the service position to the printing<br />

position.<br />

1-28 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

WARNING<br />

Danger of crushing from the side. Keep hands away from the moving<br />

printhead and gears.<br />

Caution: Remove the catchpan and service tool before moving the printhead to the<br />

printing position.<br />

Start<br />

Initiates printhead movement to the service position or the printing<br />

position.<br />

Lateral<br />

Performs an unknown function.<br />

Error<br />

Displays the Printhead lateral error screen. See “Printhead Lateral<br />

Error Screen” on page 4-14.<br />

Stop<br />

Stops printhead movement immediately.<br />

Lateral Registration Block The controls in this block allow you to<br />

enter a distance for moving a printhead.<br />

[Number]<br />

Displays the distance currently entered.<br />

Inch / mm<br />

Selects the units of measurement for printhead movement.<br />

Keypad<br />

Each number pressed places a digit for the distance. The C button<br />

clears all displayed numbers.<br />

OS<br />

Selects movement toward the operator.<br />

GS<br />

Selects movement away from the operator.<br />

Error Screen<br />

The Error screen (Figure 1.27) displays when any error occurs in the<br />

unwind unit, any gripper roller, or the rewind unit. Refer to “Error Screen”<br />

on page 4-5 for additional information.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-29


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

Figure 1.27<br />

Error screen<br />

See “Screen Selection Column” on page 1-20 for a description of the<br />

controls in the right portion of the screen.<br />

After correcting the source of an error indication, press MAIN to clear the<br />

error indicated on the Operator display.<br />

IJP Cover Screen<br />

The IJP cover screen (Figure 1.28) displays when any cover is open in<br />

any print tower. Refer to “IJP cover screen” on page 4-10 for additional<br />

information.<br />

Figure 1.28<br />

IJP cover screen<br />

Dryer Error Screen<br />

The Dryer error screen (Figure 1.29) displays when any error occurs in<br />

the dryer. Refer to “Dryer Error Screen” on page 4-11 for additional<br />

information.<br />

Figure 1.29<br />

Dryer error screen<br />

1-30 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Printhead Lateral Error Screen<br />

Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Tower Controls<br />

The Printhead lateral error screen (Figure 1.30) displays when any error<br />

occurs while moving a printhead. Refer to “Printhead Lateral Error<br />

Screen” on page 4-14 for additional information. “Printhead Lateral<br />

Errors” on page 4-12 provides information about more specific screens.<br />

Figure 1.30<br />

Printhead lateral error screen<br />

APU Cover Screen<br />

The APU cover screen (Figure 1.31) displays when any error occurs in<br />

the unwind unit, any gripper roller, or the rewind unit. Refer to “APU Cover<br />

Screen” on page 4-8 for additional information.<br />

Figure 1.31<br />

APU cover screen<br />

APU Error Screen<br />

The APU error screen (Figure 1.32) displays when an error occurs in the<br />

unwind unit, the upstream Spacer unit, or the processing unit. (The<br />

processing unit information displays even if the module is not installed.)<br />

Refer to “APU Error Screen” on page 4-7 for additional information.<br />

Figure 1.32<br />

APU error screen<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-31


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Still Picture Unit Controls<br />

APR Cover Screen<br />

The APR cover screen (Figure 1.33) displays when a cover is opened in<br />

the rewind unit. Refer to “APR Cover Screen” on page 4-15 for additional<br />

information.<br />

Figure 1.33<br />

APR cover screen<br />

APR Error Screen<br />

The APR error screen (Figure 1.34) displays when an error occurs in the<br />

unwind unit, any gripper roller, or the rewind unit. Refer to “APR Error<br />

Screen” on page 4-16 for additional information.<br />

Figure 1.34<br />

APR error screen<br />

Still Picture Unit Controls<br />

Your printing system may include a still picture unit, depending on the<br />

options installed. The information here applies to components in any<br />

configuration. The still picture unit has external controls (Figure 1.35) and<br />

internal controls (behind the OS doors, Figure 1.36).<br />

1-32 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Still Picture Unit Controls<br />

Figure 1.35<br />

External controls, still picture unit OS<br />

Upper camera control<br />

Lower camera control<br />

Camera position<br />

Zoom -<br />

Iris -<br />

Iris +<br />

Zoom +<br />

Snapshot<br />

Joystick controls<br />

Focus +<br />

Focus -<br />

Camera position<br />

Rocker arm to move the camera toward the OS or the GS.<br />

Iris +<br />

Allows more light to reach the camera.<br />

Iris -<br />

Allows less light to reach the camera.<br />

Zoom +<br />

Increases the magnification of the photo area.<br />

Zoom -<br />

Decreases the magnification of the photo area.<br />

Focus +<br />

Increases the sharpness of the photo area.<br />

Focus -<br />

Decreases the sharpness of the photo area.<br />

Snapshot<br />

Takes a photo to be displayed on the monitor.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-33


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Still Picture Unit Controls<br />

Joystick controls<br />

Advance and delay the camera flash until the portion for viewing is<br />

under the camera.<br />

Figure 1.36<br />

Internal controls, still picture unit<br />

Upper camera on/off<br />

Lower camera on/off<br />

Computer indicator<br />

Upper camera on/off<br />

Provides power to the camera, motor, and monitor for the upper<br />

camera.<br />

Lower camera on/off<br />

Provides power to the camera, motor, and monitor for the lower<br />

camera.<br />

Computer indicator<br />

Indicates the computer is operating.<br />

1-34 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Rewind Unit Controls<br />

Rewind Unit Controls<br />

Your printing system may include a rewind unit, depending on the options<br />

installed. The information here applies to components in any<br />

configuration. The rewind unit has external controls (Figure 1.37) and<br />

internal controls (behind the OS doors, Figure 1.39).<br />

Figure 1.37<br />

External controls, rewind unit OS<br />

Rewinder tension<br />

on/off<br />

Rewinder tension<br />

under/over<br />

Taper setting<br />

Tension setting<br />

Tension meter<br />

Gripper on/off<br />

Rewinder shaft down/n/up<br />

Figure 1.38<br />

Paper unloading end, rewind unit<br />

Static brush<br />

Shaft<br />

Access panels<br />

Access to shaft<br />

Lift arms<br />

Air gun<br />

Full roll sensor<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-35


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Rewind Unit Controls<br />

Figure 1.39<br />

Internal controls, rewind unit<br />

Tension controller<br />

Web guide controller<br />

Dancer tension controller<br />

Gripper<br />

air pressure<br />

Lift arm<br />

air pressure<br />

Tension setting<br />

Selects the tension from the rewind motor. The TENSION METER<br />

indicates the selected tension.<br />

Taper setting<br />

Adjusts the tension variation with the size of the rewound roll. This<br />

setting avoids coning on the roll.<br />

Rewinder tension<br />

Under Over<br />

Selects the direction of shaft movement.<br />

• Under: the paper goes underneath the shaft before it wraps<br />

around.<br />

• Over: the paper wraps around the shaft from above.<br />

Rewinder tension<br />

On Off<br />

Engages the rewind motor, which operates with a dancer roller that<br />

comes up to maintain web tension. ON must be selected before RUN<br />

SLOW or RUN FAST can operate.<br />

Tension meter<br />

Indicates the selected tension. Suggestion: use 1 kg for each inch<br />

(2.5 cm) of web width.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of pinching from rollers. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

rollers.<br />

1-36 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Controller<br />

Gripper<br />

On Off<br />

Controls the gripper roller just before the rewind shaft and, when on,<br />

keeps tension on the dancer roller. Turning this control ON locks the<br />

paper in place when you change rolls or when you splice a break, or<br />

when you shut down at the end of shift.<br />

The gripper roller it controls does not feed paper downstream.<br />

Rewinder shaft<br />

Down<br />

N<br />

Up<br />

DOWN brings the lift arms down to change paper rolls, N keeps the lift<br />

arms from raising or lowering, and UP brings the lift arms up to load<br />

an empty core for continued printing. Whenever the control is<br />

released, it immediately returns to the N position.<br />

Dancer tension controller<br />

Controls the tension supplied by the dancer rollers.<br />

Gripper air pressure<br />

Controls the air pressure of the gripper roller before the rewind shaft.<br />

Lift arm air pressure<br />

Controls the air pressure of the lift arm.<br />

Controller<br />

Figure 1.40<br />

Controllers<br />

The printing system may use one of three controllers: the CD300, the<br />

CS400, or the CS600 (Figure 1.40). Refer to the following documents for<br />

operating the controller:<br />

• CD300 online Help<br />

• CS400 online Help<br />

• CS600 online Help.<br />

CD300 CS400 CS600<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 1-37


Chapter 1. Operator Controls<br />

Print Stations<br />

Print Stations<br />

The printing system uses the DT9000 series print stations and the DH90,<br />

DH91, or DH92 printheads (Figure 1.41). Refer to the following<br />

documents for operating the print station and its printhead:<br />

• DT9000 series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> (part 0113917-602)<br />

• Controller online Help<br />

• DH9000 series printheads Replacement and Packing <strong>Guide</strong> (part<br />

0114071-602).<br />

Figure 1.41<br />

Print station and printhead<br />

Printhead<br />

interface<br />

Printhead<br />

Electronics<br />

umbilical<br />

Heated<br />

umbilical<br />

Fluidics<br />

umbilical<br />

Remote control<br />

Print station<br />

Fluid containers<br />

Ink<br />

Cleaner<br />

Replenisher<br />

Waste<br />

1-38 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2.<br />

Basic Operations<br />

Every operator frequently uses the basic operations described in this<br />

chapter. Advanced procedures for key operators and more experienced<br />

operators are in Chapter 3. Operator actions in response to error<br />

messages are in Chapter 4. Operator service procedures are in Chapter<br />

5.<br />

Overview<br />

In a typical work day, an operator will use all sections of this chapter, often<br />

in the following order:<br />

1. Use “Turning the Printing System On” on page 2-3.<br />

2. Raise the covers of all print towers (“Raising and Lowering the Cover”<br />

on page 2-24).<br />

3. If the system is not webbed, use “Loading and Unloading Paper at the<br />

Unwind Unit” on page 2-4.<br />

Note: If the roll has been left in the printing system overnight, apply air to the<br />

shaft again before running the system.<br />

4. If the system is not webbed, use “Webbing the Printing System” on<br />

page 2-4, which may include the following sections:<br />

a. “Webbing the Unwind Unit” on page 2-10.<br />

b. “Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13.<br />

c. “Webbing the Print Towers” on page 2-15.<br />

d. “Webbing the Dryer” on page 2-17.<br />

e. “Webbing the Turnbar” on page 2-19.<br />

f. “Webbing the Still Picture Unit” on page 2-19.<br />

g. “Webbing the Rewind Unit” on page 2-20.<br />

In addition, you may need the following procedures:<br />

• If you are changing the width of paper, use “Adjusting the Web<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12 and “Adjusting the Gripper Rollers” on page<br />

2 - 20.<br />

• If you are changing the outside face on the output roll, use<br />

“Selecting the Motor Direction” on page 2-22 for the rewind unit.<br />

• If you are changing the type of paper, use “Changing a Web<br />

Weight Value” on page 2-22.<br />

• If the system has just been webbed, use “Loading and Unloading<br />

Paper at the Rewind Unit” on page 2-8.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-1


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Overview<br />

5. Move all printheads to the service position (“Moving a Printhead to<br />

Service Position” on page 2-24).<br />

6. If necessary in your plant, provide your login information to the<br />

network for your controller, and start the controller software.<br />

7. Ready all the printheads that the print job requires for printing. Refer<br />

to the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> if necessary.<br />

8. Use “Adjusting the Dryer Temperature” on page 2-34 to ready the<br />

dryer(s).<br />

9. You may need to use “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23.<br />

10. If you are printing a test only for a few of the installed printheads, use<br />

“Enabling an Existing Printhead” on page 2-29.<br />

11. If the printheads are all ready, move them to their printing positions<br />

with “Moving a Printhead to Printing Position” on page 2-25.<br />

12. Use “Printing Test Pages” on page 2-41.<br />

13. If the test pages show the printhead positions are incorrect, adjust the<br />

position of each printhead with the following procedures. Some<br />

procedures may not be necessary.<br />

• “Setting Printhead Skew” on page 2-28<br />

• “Adjusting the Printing Position” on page 2-26<br />

• “Setting Printhead Height” on page 2-26.<br />

14. Set up a job to print with the following procedures:<br />

a. At the system controller, load a print job. Refer to the system<br />

controller online help.<br />

b. “Setting the Cue Delays” on page 3-22<br />

c. “Adjusting the Data Registration” on page 2-43<br />

d. “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45<br />

e. “Adjusting the Duplexed Registration” on page 2-46<br />

f. “Setting Up Page Correlation” on page 2-48<br />

g. “Positioning the Cue Sensor” on page 2-30<br />

h. “Setting the Roll End Detection” on page 2-58.<br />

Procedures While Printing a Job<br />

While running a print job (“Printing a Print Job” on page 2-42), the<br />

following adjustments may be needed:<br />

• “Adjusting the Dryer Temperature” on page 2-34<br />

• “Adjusting the Printing Position” on page 2-26<br />

• “Selecting a New Printing Speed” on page 2-53.<br />

2-2 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Recovering from Problems<br />

When the routine of printing is interrupted by web breaks or printing<br />

problems, the following procedures may be necessary:<br />

• “Recovering From an Emergency Stop” on page 2-52<br />

• “Moving a Printhead to Service Position” on page 2-24<br />

• “Reprinting Data” on page 2-47<br />

• “Selecting a New Printing Speed” on page 2-53.<br />

For recovery from problems with the printheads, refer to the Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for the DT9000 series print stations.<br />

Turning off the System<br />

Use “Turning the Printing System Off” on page 2-53.<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Operators need to perform the following actions before printing a job or to<br />

allow continued job printing.<br />

Turning the Printing System On<br />

Use the following procedure.<br />

1. If necessary, turn on the main switch at each print station. The print<br />

stations will start after turning on the control box. Refer to the DT9000<br />

series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> if necessary.<br />

2. If necessary, turn on the system controller. Its software will start<br />

automatically within a few minutes after turning on the control box.<br />

Refer to the system controller Introduction if necessary.<br />

3. If your printing system has a transformer (Figure 2.1), turn on its MAIN<br />

SWITCH.<br />

Figure 2.1<br />

Main switch, transformer<br />

Switch on/off<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-3


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

4. Inside the front door of the still picture unit, turn on the power switch.<br />

5. At the primary control box (Figure 2.2), turn on 200-V POWER.<br />

6. Turn on 400-V POWER.<br />

7. If a secondary control box is present, turn on its 200-V POWER, and<br />

then turn on its 400-V POWER.<br />

Figure 2.2<br />

Main switches, control box<br />

200-V power switch<br />

400-V power switch<br />

8. Go to “Raising and Lowering the Cover” on page 2-24 to continue<br />

system operations.<br />

Webbing the Printing System<br />

Several activities assure that the printing system has paper for printing.<br />

This section provides general information for webbing the printing system,<br />

including changing rolls of paper. Refer to “Alternative Webbing Routes”<br />

on page 2-18 for discussion of the topics you may consider for special<br />

print jobs.<br />

Several options are available for webbing the printing system. Use the<br />

illustrations in “Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13 to guide the<br />

overall work for simplex (single-sided) print jobs. Additional illustrations<br />

are shown in “Webbing the Turnbar” on page 2-19 for duplex print jobs.<br />

Loading and Unloading Paper at the Unwind Unit<br />

Changing rolls of paper requires the air gun and deflation tool (Figure<br />

2.3), which is hung near the OS of the unwind unit.<br />

2-4 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.3<br />

Air gun and deflation tool, detail<br />

Versions 1, 2 Version 3<br />

Deflation tool<br />

Air gun<br />

1. At the unwind unit OS, select BRAKE OFF.<br />

2. Select ROLLEND OFF.<br />

3. At the empty roll, unroll some paper to give some slack in the web.<br />

4. Tear the web.<br />

5. Beside the Operator display, print tower D, select ON to allow opening<br />

covers.<br />

6. At the empty roll, open the access panels.<br />

Caution: Do not place your hands, arms, legs, or feet in the path of the lift arms or<br />

roll.<br />

7. Select SHAFT DOWN until the lift arms release the shaft (Figure 2.4).<br />

Figure 2.4<br />

Roll released from lowered lift arms<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-5


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.5<br />

Deflating bladder in shaft<br />

Versions 1, 2 Version 3<br />

8. Release air pressure in the shaft (Figure 2.5).<br />

9. Remove the shaft from the core.<br />

10. Install the shaft in a new roll. Position the gears on the shaft at the<br />

GS. The roll may unwind from the top or bottom, as required by any<br />

preprinted matter.<br />

Note: The shaft may be centered in the roll or to one side. For print jobs on<br />

narrow paper, the roll may be positioned at the GS or OS end of the shaft.<br />

Refer to “Roll Position on the Unwind Shaft” on page 2-8 and “Alternative<br />

Webbing Routes” on page 2-18 for additional information.<br />

11. Roll the paper to the lift arms.<br />

12. Select SHAFT UP to bring the roll slightly off the floor.<br />

13. Apply air to the shaft (Figure 2.6).<br />

Figure 2.6<br />

Inflating shaft in roll<br />

Versions 1, 2 Version 3<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from moving paper roll. Stand back from the lift arms<br />

and paper roll during operation.<br />

14. Select SHAFT UP to bring the roll into the top position.<br />

2-6 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

15. Open the OS doors.<br />

16. If necessary, position the end of roll sensor (Figure 2.7) near the roll<br />

center.<br />

Figure 2.7<br />

Positioning end of roll sensor<br />

Versions 1 & 2 Version 3<br />

End of roll sensor<br />

Figure 2.8<br />

Using mandrel lateral adjustment<br />

17. Inside the unwind unit, flip up and turn MANDREL LATERAL ADJUST<br />

(Figure 2.8) until the roll is at the correct position between GS and<br />

OS. After the roll position is correct, flip down MANDREL LATERAL<br />

ADJUST, and close the unwind door.<br />

18. Splice the new roll to the webbed printing system.<br />

19. Select ROLLEND ON.<br />

20. Use one or more of the following procedures:<br />

• Go to “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind Unit” on page<br />

2-8.<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Unwind Unit” on page 2-10.<br />

• If the printing system is webbed, select BRAKE ON.<br />

• Continue running the current print job.<br />

• Go to step 5 in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-7


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Roll Position on the Unwind Shaft<br />

The position of the web in the unwind unit and other modules of the<br />

printing system depends on the position of the roll on the unwind shaft.<br />

The best position on the unwind shaft depends on the width of the web<br />

and the complexity of the print job:<br />

• Web width 6 to 9.99 inches (152 to 253.9 mm), simplex print job:<br />

Place the GS edge of paper at the center of the unwind shaft, and<br />

web the paper on the OS half of the machinery.<br />

• Web width 6 to 9.99 inches (152 to 253.9 mm), duplex print job: Place<br />

the OS edge of paper at the center of the unwind shaft, and web the<br />

paper on the GS half of the machinery for the first pass under the<br />

printheads. The second pass under the printheads occurs on the OS<br />

side, and the web is in best position for the sheeter-stacker unit or<br />

folding unit.<br />

• Web width 10 inches and wider (254 mm and wider): Place the center<br />

of the paper at the center of the unwind shaft, and web the paper<br />

centered in the machinery.<br />

Experienced operators may choose to place the OS edge of paper at the<br />

OS edge of the machinery. The use of other machinery may require a<br />

specific roll position on the unwind shaft. Web guides immediately before<br />

these machineries can make small corrections in the web position.<br />

Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind Unit<br />

Changing rolls of paper requires the air gun and deflation tool (Figure<br />

2.3), which are hung near the OS of the rewind unit.<br />

1. STOP the transport.<br />

2. At the rewind unit, select GRIPPER ON.<br />

3. At the empty roll (unwind) or full roll (rewind), unroll some paper to<br />

give some slack in the web.<br />

4. Tear the web.<br />

5. Beside the Operator display, print tower D, select ON to allow opening<br />

covers.<br />

6. At the empty roll, open the access panels.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from moving paper roll. Stand back from the lift arms<br />

and paper roll during operation.<br />

7. Select REWIND SHAFT DOWN until the lift arms release the shaft (Figure<br />

2.4).<br />

8. Release air pressure in the shaft (Figure 2.5).<br />

9. Remove the shaft from the core.<br />

10. Install the shaft in an empty core. The shaft gears fit at the GS.<br />

Note: The shaft may be centered in the roll or to one side. For duplex print jobs,<br />

the roll may be positioned at the GS or OS end of the shaft. Refer to<br />

“Alternative Webbing Routes” on page 2-18 for additional information.<br />

2-8 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

11. Roll the empty core to the lift arms.<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from moving paper roll. Stand back from the lift arms<br />

and paper roll during operation.<br />

12. Select REWIND SHAFT UP to bring the roll into the top position, or select<br />

REWIND SHAFT UP to bring the roll slightly off the floor.<br />

13. Position the shaft on the lift arms at the key way (Figure 2.9), and<br />

allow the shaft indent to ride on the cam follower.<br />

Figure 2.9<br />

Lift arm, rewind unit<br />

Versions 1 & 2 Version 3<br />

Key way<br />

Cam follower<br />

14. Stretch the paper from the webbed printing system to a centered<br />

position on the empty core.<br />

15. Move the core by hand until it is centered on the shaft or at the correct<br />

position.<br />

16. Using double-sided tape, tape the paper down.<br />

17. At the access for the nipple to the shaft bladder, inflate the bladder<br />

(Figure 2.10).<br />

Figure 2.10<br />

Access for inflating shaft bladder<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-9


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

18. If you are running the system for the first time of the day, reduce the<br />

TENSION SETTING to 0.<br />

19. Select GRIPPER OFF.<br />

20. Allow the dancer roller to go to its lowest position, then select TENSION<br />

ON.<br />

21. Select READY, then select JOG, and allow the core to reach five or<br />

more rotations.<br />

22. Increase the TENSION METER reading to a setting for the paper.<br />

(Standard paper is setting 11 for an 11-inch web, lighter paper may be<br />

a setting of 5.)<br />

23. If your printing system has a movable full roll sensor, position the<br />

sensor to a desired position on the roll.<br />

24. Select the direction for the rewind motor:<br />

• If the paper goes underneath the shaft before it wraps around,<br />

select REWINDER TENSION UNDER.<br />

• If the paper wraps around the shaft from above, select REWINDER<br />

TENSION OVER.<br />

25. Use one or more of the following procedures:<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Unwind Unit” on page 2-10.<br />

• Continue running the current print job.<br />

• Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Webbing the Unwind Unit<br />

The paper may roll from the top or bottom of the roll, usually dependent<br />

on any pre-print on the paper. The web route varies only slightly in each<br />

case.<br />

1. As needed, roll the web in for unwinding from the top (Figure 2.11) or<br />

bottom (Figure 2.12).<br />

Figure 2.11<br />

Webbing diagram, unwind from top<br />

Decurler<br />

(option)<br />

Web guide<br />

Web break<br />

sensor<br />

Tension<br />

detect<br />

2-10 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.12<br />

Webbing diagram, unwind from bottom<br />

Decurler<br />

(option)<br />

Web guide<br />

Web break<br />

sensor<br />

Tension<br />

detect<br />

2. Use “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Unwind Unit” on page 2-4<br />

as necessary for loading the roll.<br />

3. Unroll about 5 m, 15 ft of paper, and guide it as shown.<br />

4. At the web guide controller, select SERVO-CENTER to allow webbing.<br />

5. At the web guide, pull the paper over each roller, and through the<br />

sensor(s) (Figure 2.14). If necessary, use “Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong>”<br />

on page 2-12 to move the sensors to the OS or GS for duplex print<br />

jobs.<br />

6. At the web guide controller, select AUTOMATIC.<br />

7. <strong>Guide</strong> the paper through to the Spacer unit and its gripper roller<br />

(Figure 2.13).<br />

8. Go to one of the following sections:<br />

• “Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12<br />

• “Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13.<br />

Figure 2.13 Webbing diagram, spacer unit<br />

Print tower A<br />

Gripper roller<br />

Spacer unit<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-11


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong><br />

A web guide is inside the unwind unit (Figure 2.14). A web guide is also in<br />

any print tower that includes a turnbar and in the rewind unit. These web<br />

guides use the same configuration, including sensors to detect the edges<br />

of the paper. These sensors can be mounted at both GS and OS edges or<br />

at either the GS or OS. Refer to the BST Web Guiding Systems Operating<br />

Manual if one was supplied with your printing system. The following<br />

procedure may be changed without notice by another manufacturer.<br />

Figure 2.14<br />

Web guide components, unwind unit interior<br />

Web guide rollers<br />

Web guide sensor<br />

Most printing systems have a web guide sensor at both the GS and OS<br />

edges. Some early printing systems may have a single web guide sensor<br />

at the GS of the web.<br />

Note: The following steps are necessary only if the edges of the rewind roll are<br />

irregular or if a paper with a different width is being loaded. The printing<br />

system must be webbed.<br />

1. Open the OS doors, top cover, and sliding doors to access the web<br />

guide and web guide controller.<br />

2. On the web guide controller, select SERVO-CENTER to center the web<br />

guide roller on the paper path.<br />

3. Loosen the set screw(s) (Figure 2.15) at the web guide sensor.<br />

Figure 2.15<br />

Sensors, web guide<br />

Coarse position adjust<br />

Sensor, GS edge<br />

Set screw<br />

Sensor, OS edge<br />

4. Move the sensor(s) away from the paper path.<br />

2-12 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

5. Select READY and JOG to remove any slack from the paper at the web<br />

guide.<br />

6. Select RUN SLOW, and closely watch the paper position in reference to<br />

the edges of all rollers.<br />

7. Once the paper is positioned correctly on the rollers, select RUN FAST,<br />

and move paper at 50 fpm for 2 minutes.<br />

8. Select RUN SLOW or RUN FAST.<br />

9. Select STOP.<br />

Note: In the BST documents, “left” and “right” are used as you look along<br />

the web movement, toward the rewind.<br />

10. Slide the OS web guide sensor over the paper edge until the yellow<br />

LED is positioned as shown, between the two vertical arrows.<br />

11. If the web guide uses two sensors, slide the GS sensor over the other<br />

paper edge to position the yellow LED between the left arrows.<br />

12. Tighten the set screw(s).<br />

13. Select AUTOMATIC.<br />

14. If the LED moves away from the arrows, turn the fine adjustment in<br />

the direction that returns the LED between the arrows.<br />

15. Select READY, and then select RUN SLOW.<br />

16. Check the yellow LED position, and turn the fine adjustment if<br />

necessary.<br />

17. Once the paper is positioned correctly in the sensors, select RUN<br />

FAST, and move paper at 50 fpm for 2 minutes.<br />

18. Check the yellow LED position, and turn the fine adjustment if<br />

necessary.<br />

19. Close the OS doors, top cover, and sliding doors.<br />

20. Use one or more of the following procedures:<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13 to continue<br />

webbing.<br />

• Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to set the web tension in<br />

the print tower.<br />

• Go to step 15 in “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23.<br />

Webbing the Spacer Unit<br />

The web comes from the unwind unit or from print tower D. The following<br />

steps assume this is the first pass into the print towers.<br />

1. At print tower A, select GRIPPER WHEEL OFF to lift the gripper roller.<br />

2. At the spacer unit, guide the paper between the infeed roller and the<br />

gripper roller (Figure 2.13).<br />

3. At print tower A, select GRIPPER WHEEL ON to close the gripper roller.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-13


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

4. If necessary, use “Adjusting the Gripper Rollers” on page 2-14 to<br />

assure even pull on the paper. Final adjustment of the gripper roller<br />

will be made later.<br />

5. Jog the paper through to feed paper to the next roller in the print<br />

tower (“Jogging the Web” on page 2-14).<br />

6. Use one of the following options, depending on the print job and the<br />

options installed in your printing system:<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Print Towers” on page 2-15.<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Still Picture Unit” on page 2-19.<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Rewind Unit” on page 2-20.<br />

Jogging the Web<br />

Several controls for jogging are placed conveniently for use:<br />

• Unwind unit exterior (Figure 1.7)<br />

• Print tower A (Figure 1.14)<br />

• Operator display, Main screen (Figure 1.21) and other screens<br />

• Rewind unit exterior (Figure 1.37).<br />

The operator display does not show a web speed while jogging the web.<br />

1. Press READY until the alarm stops.<br />

2. Press and hold JOG until the web has moved as far as desired.<br />

3. Continue with system operation.<br />

Adjusting the Gripper Rollers<br />

This procedure and the next two are usually done together first for the<br />

rewind unit. Then the procedures are repeated for the unwind unit.<br />

1. Check the location of the web passing through the gripper rollers.<br />

2. If either roller is close to the center or edge of the web, adjust its<br />

position.<br />

• Each roller should be 1 /4 of the distance in from each edge of the<br />

web.<br />

• The position release above the roller loosens the assembly on<br />

the rail (Figure 2.16).<br />

Figure 2.16 Gripper roller adjustment detail<br />

Position release, roller<br />

Gripper roller<br />

2-14 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

3. At the controlling module, select the gripper roller to engage it.<br />

4. Check the amount of pressure from a gripper roller on the pull roller.<br />

5. If necessary, adjust the roller pressure using the following bullets:<br />

• If the web slips between the rollers, the pressure is too light.<br />

Increase the air pressure with the knob and pressure gauge near<br />

the roller on/off button.<br />

The air pressure controls are described at the following locations:<br />

“Gripper pressure” on page 1-17, “Gripper pressure” on page 1-<br />

18, “Gripper air pressure” on page 1-37.<br />

• If the web is damaged or wrinkled by the rollers, the pressure is<br />

too great. Decrease the air pressure.<br />

Webbing the Print Towers<br />

Your printing system may have one or two groups of print towers. Each<br />

group may have from two to four print towers. Each group will have at<br />

least print towers A and D.<br />

1. Jog the web to feed paper through the web cleaner. (Open the web<br />

cleaner box, and feed paper through the outlet, Figure 2.17.)<br />

Figure 2.17<br />

Web cleaner box detail<br />

Lid, web cleaner box<br />

Outlet, web cleaner box<br />

2. Jog the web to feed paper for one of the following options:<br />

• If the web needs to be turned, route the paper through the<br />

turnbar. See “Webbing the Turnbar” on page 2-19. Use Figure<br />

2.19 to route paper through the turnbar first.<br />

• If the web from the Spacer unit has the side for printing facing up,<br />

route the paper through the web guide. See “Adjusting the Web<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12 if necessary. Use Figure 2.18 to route paper<br />

through the web guide.<br />

3. Jog the web to feed paper through the gripper rollers, around the tach<br />

roller, and to the first printhead.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-15


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

4. <strong>Guide</strong> the web under all GS printheads, and over all rollers. For splitweb,<br />

half-width, one-up and duplex jobs, the webbing passes under<br />

the GS printheads first.<br />

Note: It is important to have the web supported by a roller directly beneath each<br />

print array.<br />

5. In print tower D, guide the web through the page correlation sensors.<br />

6. Go to “Webbing the Dryer” on page 2-17.<br />

Figure 2.18<br />

Webbing for simplex 1-up or 2-up<br />

Page<br />

correlation<br />

sensors<br />

Gripper<br />

roller<br />

Cue<br />

sensor<br />

Tach<br />

roller<br />

Dryer<br />

Web<br />

guide<br />

Turnbar<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Print tower A Print tower B Print tower C Print tower D<br />

Figure 2.19<br />

Webbing for 1-up or 2-up turned<br />

Page<br />

correlation<br />

sensors<br />

Gripper<br />

roller<br />

Cue<br />

sensor<br />

Tach<br />

roller<br />

Dryer<br />

Web<br />

guide<br />

Turnbar<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Print tower A Print tower B Print tower C Print tower D<br />

2-16 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Additional illustrations are shown in “Webbing the Turnbar” on page 2-19<br />

for duplex print jobs and in “Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2 for other<br />

print jobs. For split-web, half-width, one-up and duplex jobs, the webbing<br />

passes under the GS printheads first, then through the dryer and into the<br />

turnbar. The reverse side then passes under the OS printheads, through<br />

the dryer, and into the next set of print towers or into the rewind unit.<br />

Webbing the Dryer<br />

Caution: If printing has occurred, the dryer will be hot. Allow the dryer to cool at<br />

least 15 minutes before moving the dryer housing and webbing the dryer.<br />

Route paper through the dryer with the following steps:<br />

1. Beside the Operator display, print tower D, select ON to allow opening<br />

covers.<br />

2. Open the OS doors of print tower D.<br />

3. Open the GS doors of print tower D.<br />

4. Push the dryer housing back to expose the dryer drum (Figure 2.20).<br />

Figure 2.20<br />

Dryer housing and drum<br />

Housing pushed back<br />

Dryer housing<br />

Drum<br />

Handle<br />

Figure 2.21<br />

Dryer webbing, single pass<br />

Page<br />

correlation<br />

sensors<br />

Dryer<br />

Print tower C<br />

Print tower D<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-17


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.22<br />

Dryer webbing, double pass<br />

Page<br />

correlation<br />

sensors<br />

Print tower C<br />

Print tower D<br />

5. Use one of the following options, depending on the print job:<br />

• If the print job requires simplex (single-side) printing, use Figure<br />

2.21 and go to step 6.<br />

• If the print job requires duplex (double-side) printing and the web<br />

has not been turned, use Figure 2.22 and go to “Webbing the<br />

Turnbar” on page 2-19.<br />

• If the web has been turned for duplex printing, and the web has<br />

gone through the dryer twice, use Figure 2.21 and go to step 6.<br />

6. Route the web into the Spacer unit.<br />

7. From outside the GS, push the dryer housing back into the print<br />

tower.<br />

8. From the OS, inside the print tower, close the dryer housing<br />

completely.<br />

9. Use one of the following options, depending on the print job and the<br />

options installed in your printing system:<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Turnbar” on page 2-19.<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Still Picture Unit” on page 2-19.<br />

• Go to “Webbing the Rewind Unit” on page 2-20.<br />

Alternative Webbing Routes<br />

When you are printing a duplex or two-up print job, the portion with<br />

process color or with tighter registration requirements should be printed<br />

with the printheads closer to the OS. The printhead positions near the OS<br />

allow for more accurate registration and easier adjustment of the<br />

printhead position. Refer to “Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2 for<br />

additional information.<br />

2-18 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Webbing the Turnbar<br />

Several options are available for duplex (double-sided) print jobs. Use the<br />

following illustrations to guide the overall work. Additional illustrations are<br />

shown in “Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13 for duplex print jobs.<br />

Figure 2.23<br />

Webbing diagram, print tower turnbar detail<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1. Use one of the following options:<br />

• Route the web from the Spacer unit to the upstream roller directly<br />

underneath the turnbar.<br />

• Route the web from the dryer (Figure 2.22) to the gripper roller<br />

(Figure 1.18), over the two rollers in print towers C and B, and<br />

under the downstream roller directly underneath the turnbar.<br />

2. Using Figure 2.23, web the turnbar.<br />

Hint: The web runs from the inside of each diagonal roller to the<br />

outside of the gripper roller at the turnbar.<br />

3. Go to “Webbing the Print Towers” on page 2-15.<br />

Webbing the Still Picture Unit<br />

Use the following steps:<br />

1. Jog the web from the gripper roller in the Spacer unit. (Refer to<br />

“Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13 if needed.)<br />

2. Bring the web under the infeed roller, and over the two rollers<br />

underneath or between the camera(s) (Figure 2.24).<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-19


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.24<br />

Webbing diagram, still picture unit<br />

Camera front<br />

Cue<br />

sensor<br />

Camera rear<br />

3. Assure the web is positioned correctly over the sensor and between<br />

the cameras.<br />

4. Bring the web under the outfeed roller.<br />

5. Continue with webbing of the next module.<br />

Webbing the Rewind Unit<br />

Use the following steps:<br />

1. Jog the web from the gripper roller in the Spacer unit. (Refer to<br />

“Webbing the Spacer Unit” on page 2-13 if needed.)<br />

2. <strong>Guide</strong> the paper through the web guide and to the gripper roller.<br />

3. Jog the paper through to feed paper through the final four rollers and<br />

to the rewind shaft, rewinding at the top (Figure 2.25) or bottom<br />

(Figure 2.26).<br />

2-20 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Figure 2.25<br />

Webbing diagram, rewind to top<br />

Web<br />

guide<br />

Gripper<br />

roller<br />

Web break<br />

detector<br />

Dancer<br />

roller<br />

Figure 2.26<br />

Webbing diagram, rewind to bottom<br />

Web<br />

guide<br />

Gripper<br />

roller<br />

Web break<br />

detector<br />

Dancer<br />

roller<br />

4. Use “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Unwind Unit” on page 2-4<br />

as necessary for loading an empty core.<br />

5. Go to “Selecting the Motor Direction” on page 2-22 to continue<br />

system operations.<br />

6. Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system operations<br />

or go to “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-21


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Setting the Units of the Speed Display<br />

The speed can be displayed in feet or meters. The procedure for<br />

changing the display units is performed by service persons.<br />

Selecting the Motor Direction<br />

The following procedure depends on how the web rolls onto the rewind<br />

shaft. See step 24 in “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind Unit”<br />

on page 2-8.<br />

1. Use one of the following options:<br />

• If the paper goes underneath the shaft before it wraps around,<br />

select REWINDER TENSION UNDER.<br />

• If the paper wraps around the shaft from above, select REWINDER<br />

TENSION OVER.<br />

2. Use one of the following options:<br />

• Go to step 25 in “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind<br />

Unit” on page 2-8.<br />

• Go to step • in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Changing a Web Weight Value<br />

Use this procedure to add a new web weight or to change a web weight<br />

value already on the screen.<br />

1. At print tower D, operator display Main screen, select WEB.<br />

2. If the weight is displayed, select the WEIGHT.<br />

Note: If the proper weight is not displayed, select a displayed value that is<br />

close, and use “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23 to modify the<br />

tension settings.<br />

3. If the paper weight has not been run before, use “Tightening the Web”<br />

on page 2-23 to correct the default tension settings.<br />

Note: “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23 is also recommended to adjust<br />

tension for heavy or light ink use, changed dryer temperatures, or<br />

humidity in the facility.<br />

2-22 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Tightening the Web<br />

Use this procedure after the printing system is webbed. The procedure<br />

can be used for any of the following reasons:<br />

• Using a paper type or weight that has not been run before<br />

• Adjusting the settings for a print job that prints more or less ink than<br />

the previous print job<br />

• Adjusting the settings for higher or lower humidity<br />

• Adjusting the settings for higher or lower dryer settings<br />

• Correcting excessive paper drift (a sign of loose web tension)<br />

• Correcting excessive web breaks or snapping sounds while printing<br />

(signs of high web tension).<br />

Note: Tension control from the system controller is not implemented at the date<br />

of publication.<br />

Note: The procedure assumes all optional modules are installed. Some steps<br />

may be skipped if your printing system does not include optional modules.<br />

1. On the web guide controller, select SERVO-CENTER to center the web<br />

guide roller on the paper path.<br />

2. Select READY, and then select JOG.<br />

3. Engage the following gripper rollers:<br />

• Print tower A: GRIPPER WHEEL ON<br />

• Turnbar, print tower A: GRIPPER WHEEL ON<br />

• Print tower C: GRIPPER WHEEL ON<br />

4. At the unwind unit, select BRAKE ON.<br />

5. In the first print tower A, press OUTFEED WEB TENSION. This selection<br />

operates the gripper rollers in the Spacer unit between two banks of<br />

print towers. The selection tightens the web inside the upstream print<br />

towers.<br />

6. In the second (downstream) print tower A, press INFEED WEB TENSION.<br />

This selection tightens the web from the outfeed of the first print<br />

towers to the turnbar in the second print tower A.<br />

7. In the downstream print tower A, press OUTFEED WEB TENSION. This<br />

selection tightens the web in the downstream print towers and makes<br />

the web slacker downstream.<br />

8. Choose the next steps depending on the options used.<br />

Roll-to-roll<br />

a. On the rewind unit, tighten the web by hand.<br />

b. Select REWIND TENSION OFF.<br />

c. Take up the slack by moving the rewind roll by hand until it feels<br />

tight, until the dancer roller begins to raise from its bottom<br />

position.<br />

d. Select REWIND TENSION ON with the other hand. The mandrel will<br />

start to rotate.<br />

e. Go to step 9.<br />

9. At the Operator display, select READY, and then select JOG.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-23


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

10. Close the doors to all modules.<br />

11. Near the Operator display, print tower D, turn off OPERATOR KEY.<br />

12. Run slow for about 2 minutes to allow paper to move the entire<br />

distance from the unwind unit to the last finishing module.<br />

13. Near the Operator display, print tower D, turn on OPERATOR KEY.<br />

14. Check all web guides for correct positioning of the web. If necessary,<br />

perform “Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12.<br />

15. Near the Operator display, print tower D, turn off OPERATOR KEY.<br />

16. Select READY, and then select RUN SLOW.<br />

17. Go to step 12 in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Note: Do not use “Setting the Web Tension” on page 3-16 unless the<br />

web is extremely tight or loose. Allow the system to print on and dry<br />

the web before setting the web tension.<br />

Printhead Activities<br />

The following procedures allow close work with the printheads.<br />

Raising and Lowering the Cover<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

DANGER<br />

Danger of crushing from above. Keep hands and clothing away from<br />

gears. Do not operate with guard removed.<br />

1. Press COVER UP. An alarm sounds while the cover is moving.<br />

Note: In printing systems with the HEPA filter, a warning occurs if printing<br />

is run at a speed greater than 75 fpm (22 mpm) with the hoods<br />

open. If the warning exists for seven minutes, an error will occur<br />

and printing will stop.<br />

2. To lower the cover, press COVER UP.<br />

3. Continue with printhead operations or printing system operations.<br />

• If you are starting the printing system, go to step 3 in “Overview”<br />

on page 2-1.<br />

• If the printing system is webbed, and you are resuming a job, go<br />

to “Moving a Printhead to Service Position” on page 2-24.<br />

Moving a Printhead to Service Position<br />

All printhead movement is controlled from the Operator display at print<br />

tower D. Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the Operator display at print tower D, press REGISTRATION.<br />

2. Select printheads by pressing one or more printhead buttons.<br />

3. Press HOME.<br />

2-24 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

4. Press START. The printhead moves immediately.<br />

Figure 2.27<br />

Printhead in service position<br />

5. Perform a printhead operation, such as the following options. Refer to<br />

the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> for details.<br />

• Readying one or more printheads<br />

• Selecting service clean<br />

• Swabbing a printhead.<br />

6. Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

To return the printhead to the operating position, use “Moving a Printhead<br />

to Printing Position” on page 2-25<br />

Moving a Printhead to Printing Position<br />

All printhead movement is controlled from the Operator display at print<br />

tower D. Use the following procedure:<br />

1. Remove the catchpan or other attached items.<br />

2. At the Operator display at print tower D, press REGISTRATION.<br />

3. Select printheads by pressing one or more printhead buttons.<br />

4. Press RETURN.<br />

5. Press START and answer “OK” to the request to remove the catchpan.<br />

The printhead moves immediately.<br />

Note: The printhead must be far enough from the cover to allow full<br />

closure. If the printhead is too far OS, a repeated beep indicates<br />

the cover cannot close safely. Refer to “Adjusting the Printing<br />

Position”.<br />

Note: In printing systems with the HEPA filter, a warning occurs if printing<br />

is run at a speed greater than 75 fpm (22 mpm) with the hoods<br />

open. If the warning exists for seven minutes, an error will occur<br />

and printing will stop.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-25


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Adjusting the Printing Position<br />

All printhead movement is controlled from the Operator display at print<br />

tower D. Use the following procedure:<br />

1. Start printing test patterns or a print job (see “Printing Test Pages” on<br />

page 2-41).<br />

2. At the Operator display at print tower D, press REGISTRATION.<br />

3. If one or more printheads are at the service position, move the<br />

printhead(s) to the printing position.<br />

4. Select a printhead by pressing a printhead button.<br />

5. If desired, press INCH or MM to change to the alternate unit of<br />

measurement.<br />

6. Using the keypad, enter a value for the distance to move.<br />

7. Press OS or GS. The printhead moves immediately.<br />

8. Check the preprint on the web, and repeat from step 2 for the same<br />

printhead or other printheads.<br />

• Printhead locations at the end of this procedure are their printing<br />

positions until any later change.<br />

• When moving a printhead from service position, pressing RETURN<br />

moves the printhead back to this printing position.<br />

9. If the printhead is to print a cue mark, go to “Positioning the Cue<br />

Sensor” on page 2-30.<br />

10. Resume system operations or go to “Printing a Print Job” on page 2-<br />

42.<br />

Setting Printhead Height<br />

Refer to the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> for information<br />

on the effect on printing with these adjustments.<br />

Figure 2.28<br />

Printhead position controls<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Set lever<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Skew adjust knob<br />

2-26 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Optimum printhead height is 0.075 inch (1.90 mm). However, for certain<br />

substrates, the printhead may be as high as 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).<br />

Measure the height with a feeler gauge without paper in the printing<br />

system. Improper printhead height can cause print defects, such as<br />

blurred or smeared print. See the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for details.<br />

Figure 2.29<br />

Printhead height measurement<br />

Air dam<br />

Eyelid<br />

Air dam<br />

Air dams<br />

0.075-0.100"<br />

Substrate<br />

1. Position the printhead over the area where printing will occur.<br />

2. Using a feeler gauge, measure the distance between the air dam on<br />

one side of the printhead and the substrate immediately below. (The<br />

gauge should have a small amount of drag.)<br />

3. If the height is not between 0.075 to 0.100 inch, turn the HEIGHT SET<br />

LEVER counter-clockwise.<br />

4. Turn the left and right HEIGHT ADJUST KNOB clockwise to lower the<br />

printhead or counterclockwise to raise it.<br />

Note: Turning the height adjust screws unequal amounts can affect the<br />

angle of the printhead.<br />

5. When the height is correct, tighten the HEIGHT SET LEVER.<br />

6. Measure the printhead height again, and make any necessary<br />

corrections.<br />

7. Repeat step 1 through step 6 for each printhead in the printing<br />

system.<br />

8. Use one of the following options:<br />

• Go to “Setting Printhead Skew” on page 2-28.<br />

• If all colors have been set for skew and height, go to “Adjusting<br />

the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-27


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

Setting Printhead Skew<br />

Screws at the OS and GS ends of the printhead bottom can adjust the<br />

print array horizontal position to be parallel to the roller. Zero skew aligns<br />

the print array perpendicular to the edge of the web.<br />

This procedure is best performed with two persons. One person observes<br />

the result of each adjustment with a loupe at the last roller of print tower<br />

D; the other person makes small adjustments to skew at the printhead.<br />

Note: For printing systems that print four-color process or spot color, perform<br />

this procedure first with the printheads that are most upstream. (In fourcolor<br />

systems, the C (cyan) printhead(s) are the most upstream.) Then<br />

perform this procedure for the next color downstream (M (magenta)<br />

printheads in a four-color system). Next, the K (black) printheads, and,<br />

finally, the Y (yellow) printheads.<br />

1. At the system controller software, enable printing by the first<br />

printheads to print, and disable printing by all other printheads. Refer<br />

to “Enabling an Existing Printhead” on page 2-29 and “Disabling an<br />

Existing Printhead” on page 2-30.<br />

These first printheads include all those that print cyan in a process<br />

color system. Refer to figures in “Identifying Printheads” on page 3-2<br />

for the printhead identifies.<br />

2. Use one of the following options:<br />

• If your printing system does not include a processing unit, move<br />

the printhead(s) to print at the extreme sides of the web.<br />

• If your printing system uses a processing unit, use the punched<br />

holes as a measure of skew. Move the printhead(s) to print inside<br />

each set of punched holes. When skew is correctly adjusted, the<br />

printed lines should occur at the same point of the punched<br />

holes.<br />

• If your printing system includes a processing unit, but its punch<br />

cylinder is not engaged, move the printhead(s) to print at the<br />

extreme sides of the web.<br />

3. Start printing a test pattern (“Printing Test Pages” on page 2-41).<br />

Figure 2.30<br />

Printhead position controls, print tower A<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Set lever<br />

Height adjust knob<br />

Skew adjust knob<br />

2-28 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Preliminary Operations<br />

4. Turn the HEIGHT SET LEVER counter-clockwise (Figure 2.30).<br />

5. Turn the SKEW ADJUST KNOB until the cross-web lines printed in the<br />

test pattern are perpendicular to the edge of the paper.<br />

6. Select Stop printing and web movement.<br />

7. At the system controller software, enable printing by the next set of<br />

printheads. Refer to “Enabling an Existing Printhead” on page 2-29.<br />

With each repetition of the procedure, leave the first set of printheads<br />

enabled, and enable the printheads in one other print tower. Use the<br />

printing from the first set of printheads as a reference for other<br />

printheads.<br />

8. As needed, repeat step 3 through step 7. For process color systems,<br />

use the following combinations:<br />

• Cyan and magenta<br />

• Cyan and black<br />

• Cyan and yellow.<br />

9. At the system controller software, enable printing by all printheads.<br />

10. Go to “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45.<br />

CS400<br />

Enabling an Existing Printhead<br />

The following procedure may be used to enable a printhead that was<br />

disabled in a previous print job. The procedure also completes the<br />

process of installing an additional printhead in the printing system. After<br />

installing the additional printhead, a key operator can use “Adding a<br />

Printhead to the Configuration” on page 3-6 before using this procedure.<br />

1. Using the Job Setup Sheet, determine the printheads required with<br />

the report displayed after selecting Job → IJPDS or Job → MPC at<br />

the controller.<br />

2. Select Job → Printers.<br />

3. Drag the correct printhead icon from the correct data station to the<br />

correct printer.<br />

4. Select that RIP number.<br />

5. Select Apply to save your changes.<br />

6. If the printhead is to print a cue mark, select Options.<br />

7. Select Cue mark in the printer that contains the printhead.<br />

8. Define the cue mark location and size.<br />

9. Select Apply to save your changes.<br />

10. Using the Job Setup Sheet, verify the printheads required with the<br />

report displayed after selecting Tools → Report.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-29


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS400<br />

Disabling an Existing Printhead<br />

The following procedure may be used to disable a printhead that is not<br />

needed in the current print job. The procedure is also needed when<br />

correcting printhead skew and registration.<br />

1. Select Job → Printers.<br />

2. Drag the printhead icon from the printer to a data station.<br />

3. Deselect that RIP number.<br />

4. Select Apply to save your changes.<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

An operator uses the following operations to start printing a job.<br />

Positioning the Cue Sensor<br />

Several cue sensors may be located in the printing system: one cue<br />

sensor is in print tower A, another sensor is present for the turnbar<br />

(Figure 2.32), and several sensors are present if the page correlation<br />

option is installed (Figure 2.40).<br />

Caution: Doesn’t the still picture unit have a cue sensor also? (Figure 2.33).<br />

Figure 2.31<br />

Front cue sensor location, print tower A<br />

Cue sensor for front<br />

2-30 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

Figure 2.32<br />

Back cue sensor location, print tower B<br />

Cue sensor for back<br />

Figure 2.33<br />

Cue sensor location, still picture unit<br />

Cue sensor rail<br />

Cue sensor<br />

You may see one of two different cue sensors (Figure 2.34).<br />

1. Perform the following steps at each cue sensor:<br />

a. Loosen the set knob, and slide the sensor over the cue mark<br />

(Figure 2.34).<br />

b. Tighten the set knob.<br />

2. If necessary, go to “Adjusting the Cue Sensor” on page 3-19 to<br />

continue cue sensor setup.<br />

3. Jog the web, and check each cue sensor for sensing the cue marks.<br />

4. Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-31


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

Figure 2.34<br />

Cue sensors and bracket<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Set knob<br />

Positioning the Web Break Sensor<br />

Several web break sensors may be located inside the unwind unit (Figure<br />

2.35) and print tower D (Figure 2.36), and rewind unit (Figure 2.37).<br />

Figure 2.35<br />

Web break sensor locations, unwind unit<br />

Web break rail<br />

Web break sensor<br />

2-32 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

Figure 2.36<br />

Web break sensor locations, print tower D<br />

Web break sensor<br />

Figure 2.37<br />

Web break sensor locations, rewind unit<br />

Web break rail<br />

Web break sensor<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-33


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

1. Perform the following steps at each web break sensor:<br />

a. Loosen the set knob, and slide the sensor over the web (Figure<br />

2.34).<br />

b. Adjust the angle so the sensor beam is perpendicular to the web.<br />

c. Tighten the set knob.<br />

Figure 2.38<br />

Web break sensor and bracket<br />

Set knob<br />

Web break sensor<br />

Web<br />

2. Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Adjusting the Dryer Temperature<br />

The drying temperature can vary widely. The necessary temperature for<br />

complete drying depends on humidity in the facility, the type of paper, the<br />

speed of printing, and the amount of ink coverage. Generally, a higher<br />

drying temperature is needed if the paper is coated, tightly calendered, or<br />

otherwise treated to produce a very close surface. Use the following steps<br />

to change the dryer temperature.<br />

1. Stop printing.<br />

2. From the Main screen, print tower D, select Dryer.<br />

3. To select the portion(s) of the drum to be used, select Drum. If the<br />

drum portion selection is correct, go to step 5.<br />

4. Press Up arrow or Down arrow to select the portion of the drum that<br />

is used (OS, GS or OS+GS).<br />

5. To set the temperature in the drum, select Drum temp. If the drum<br />

temperature is correct, go to step 7.<br />

6. Press Up arrow or Down arrow to change the current displayed<br />

value for the target temperature.<br />

7. To select the air zones, select Air.<br />

2-34 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

8. Press Up arrow or Down arrow to select the zones. 1 through 6<br />

zones may be used, and a temperature is selected for each zone.<br />

9. Select Air temp.<br />

10. Press Up arrow or Down arrow to change the current displayed<br />

value for the target temperature.<br />

11. If desired, repeat step 7 through step 10 for each of the air exhaust<br />

routes used.<br />

12. If you are ready to print, select On. Printing can start after the Dryer<br />

status displays Ready.<br />

Setting Up a Print Job<br />

Use the following steps before printing a new print job or starting a<br />

different job.<br />

1. Using a Job Setup Sheet or other documents that describe the print<br />

job, verify the setup of the printing system matches the job<br />

requirements. Check the following items:<br />

• 1-up or 2-up<br />

• Simplex or duplex<br />

• Preprinted cue marks, cue marks printed in the job, or no cue<br />

marks<br />

• Number of documents, pieces, forms, or pages for each cue mark<br />

• Document size<br />

• Ink color<br />

• Number of printheads<br />

• Paper type.<br />

2. With printing stopped, and at the controller, select a template file or<br />

setup file with the following lettered steps:<br />

a. Select Application.<br />

b. Select File → New to create a file, or select File → Open to<br />

select an existing file.<br />

3. If the configuration is changing, set up the new configuration with the<br />

following lettered steps:<br />

a. Select Transport.<br />

b. Select Model.<br />

c. Add or delete modules to match the configuration required by the<br />

Job Setup Sheet.<br />

Refer to the controller online help for additional detail about the<br />

meanings of the module icons and how this screen works.<br />

4. Select Job → Setup. Use the following group of substeps depending<br />

on your controller.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-35


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS600<br />

a. Modify the Physical printable area by providing a width and<br />

length of what is to be printed, including any cue marks, register<br />

marks, or page correlation marks to be printed. Refer to Figure<br />

2.39<br />

Figure 2.39<br />

Printed area, physical printable and valid printed<br />

Cue mark<br />

Physical printable area<br />

Valid printed area<br />

Job data<br />

Register mark<br />

Page correlation mark<br />

Suscipit lorem ipsum<br />

dolor sit amet, con<br />

sectetuer adipiscing elit,<br />

sed diam nonnumy nibh<br />

euismod tempor inci dunt<br />

ut labore et dolore magna<br />

ali quam erat volupat. Ut<br />

wisi enim ad minim<br />

veniam, quis nostrud<br />

exerci tation ullamcorper<br />

suscipit laboris nisl ut<br />

aliquip ex ea commodo<br />

con sequat. Duis autem<br />

vel eum irure dolor in<br />

henderit in vulputate velit<br />

esse con sequat.<br />

Vel illum dolore eu<br />

feugiat nulla facilisi at<br />

vero eos et accusam et ius<br />

to odio dignissim qui<br />

blandit prae seent<br />

luptatum zzril delenit<br />

aigue duos dolore et<br />

molestias exceptur sint<br />

occaecat cupiditat non<br />

simil pro vedit tempor<br />

sunt in culpa qui officia<br />

deserunt mollit anium<br />

ib est abor um et dolor<br />

fuga. Et harumd dereud<br />

facilis est er expedit<br />

distinct. Nam liber<br />

tempor cum soluta<br />

nobis eligend option<br />

congue nihil impediet<br />

doming id quod maxim<br />

placeat facer possim<br />

omnis voluptas<br />

assumenda est, omnis<br />

repellend.<br />

Temporibud auteui<br />

quinusd et aur office<br />

debit aut tum rerum<br />

necessit atib saepe<br />

eveniet ut er molestia<br />

non recusand. Itaque<br />

earud rerum hic ten tury<br />

sapiente delectus au aut<br />

prefer zim endis dolorib<br />

asperiore repellat. Hanc<br />

ego cum tene senteniam,<br />

quid est cur verear ne ad<br />

eam non possing<br />

accomodare nost ros quos<br />

tu paulo ante cum<br />

memorite tum etia ergat.<br />

Nos amice et nbevol,<br />

olestias access potest fier<br />

ad augend ascum consci<br />

ent to factor tum poen<br />

legum odio que civiuda.<br />

Et tamen in busdam<br />

neque nonor imper ned<br />

libiding gen epular reli<br />

guard cupiditati quas nul<br />

la praid om undat.<br />

Improb pary minuit,<br />

potios im flammad ut<br />

coercend magist and et<br />

dodencendesse<br />

videantur. Inviat tur<br />

vera ratio bene sanos<br />

adzum justiatiam,<br />

aequitated.<br />

Fidem neque hominy<br />

infant aut inuiste fact<br />

est cond qui neg facile<br />

efficerd possit duo<br />

conetud notiner si<br />

effercerit, et opes vel<br />

fortunag vel ingen<br />

liberalitat magis<br />

conveniunt, da but<br />

tuntung ben evolent sib<br />

conciliant, et aptis sim<br />

est ad quiet. Endium<br />

caritat prae sert cum<br />

omning nul sit<br />

causoeccand quaert en<br />

imigent cupidat a natura<br />

proficis vacile explent<br />

sine julla inura autend<br />

b. Modify the Valid printed area to specify the area for printed<br />

material used in the finished piece.<br />

• Provide, in the X (in.) and Y (in.) entries, the starting point<br />

from the upper left corner of the Physical printable area.<br />

• Provide the actual size of the printed area in the Width (in.)<br />

and Length (in.) entries.<br />

c. Modify the Media for the front and back sides, by selecting<br />

options from the drop-down lists, as needed.<br />

d. Modify the Ink for the front and back sides, by selecting options<br />

from the drop-down lists, as needed.<br />

2-36 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

e. Modify the Calibration entries as needed.<br />

• The Front X1, Front X2, Back X1, and Back X2 entries define<br />

the cross-web positions of up to four spectrophotometers.<br />

There is no need for a Y position.<br />

• The four spectrophotometers can be positioned in different<br />

cross-web locations, to keep each measurement discrete.<br />

• Front X1 is always used.<br />

• Front X2 is used in a 2-up job.<br />

• Back X1 is used in a duplex job.<br />

• Back X2 is used in a two-up duplex job.<br />

• The Web speed of 25 is used only during color calibration.<br />

f. Select Apply to save your changes.<br />

g. Go to step 5 on page 2-39.<br />

CS400<br />

a. Select the Type of the job file from the options shown.<br />

b. Identify the file location.<br />

c. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

In the function bar, the IJPDS or MPC button enables to match<br />

the job type you selected.<br />

d. Verify the information displayed for the file(s) and RIP(s) with<br />

information in your Job Setup Sheet.<br />

e. Select IJPDS or MPC, depending on the type of job.<br />

f. Verify the displayed information with in formation in your Job<br />

Setup Sheet. See “Using an MPC Manual Setup” on page 3-7 for<br />

detailed instructions for using the MPC screen.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-37


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

g. Go to step 5 on page 2-39.<br />

CS300<br />

Note: The following steps require an operator who is experienced with<br />

graphic arts, especially with a process-color background. For more<br />

information on any of the lettered steps, see “Setting Up Printing for<br />

the CS300” on page 3-8.<br />

a. Select Forms. Select a form from the options shown, create a<br />

new form, or change one of the existing forms.<br />

b. Select Colors. Map the system colors used in the Job Setup<br />

Shee to printheads printing on the front or back of the web. Press<br />

the Front or Back color button until the correct color is selected.<br />

(Colors have been identified with the Transport → Setup →<br />

Printhead screen.)<br />

c. Select Setup. Select the print options from the options shown.<br />

d. If your printing system produces process color product, select<br />

Spot. Select an OCA color, and then identify its component colors<br />

by selecting one or more system colors and setting the intensity<br />

of each.<br />

e. If your printing system prints spot colors that are either true spot<br />

colors or colors composed of two or more inks, select Highlight,<br />

and define these highlight colors.<br />

f. If your process colors should use color correction, select Correct.<br />

g. If your data includes an area to be compared from form to form,<br />

select Bit region to identify the area.<br />

h. From the subsystem bar, select Transport.<br />

i. From the Transport work area, select each Printhead.<br />

j. If necessary, modify its information for Cue sensor, RIP, Mount,<br />

Color, and Page correlation.<br />

2-38 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

k. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

l. Select each printhead, and repeat from step i.<br />

m. From the Transport work area, select Cue sensor A.<br />

n. Change the cue definition to match the Job Setup Sheet.<br />

o. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

p. Select each cue sensor to be used in the job, and repeat from<br />

step m.<br />

q. From the Transport work area, select Unwind.<br />

r. Enable the module and set the unwind tension.<br />

s. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

t. From the Transport work area, select each Print tower.<br />

u. Enable the module.<br />

v. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

w. From the Transport work area, select each Dryer.<br />

x. Enable the module and set the dryer temperature.<br />

y. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

z. From the Transport work area, select each Turnbar<br />

aa. Enable the module.<br />

ab. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

ac. From the Transport work area, select Rewind or another finishing<br />

option.<br />

ad. Enable the module.<br />

ae. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

af. Go to step 16.<br />

CS600 & CS400 5. From the function bar, select Printers, and use the following lettered<br />

steps.<br />

a. Drag all appropriate printheads from the data station column (left<br />

side) to the printer column (right side).<br />

• Each printer accepts one or more printheads from a given data<br />

station.<br />

• Printheads from the same data station will be used as a single<br />

stitched unit.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-39


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

Select the RIP and its printheads<br />

b. Select all appropriate RIPs for Printers 1 through 8.<br />

c. If appropriate, use the Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons to<br />

correct any RIP identities.<br />

6. From the subsystem bar, select Print.<br />

7. From the function bar, select Verify to compare the displayed printing<br />

system to the job requirements.<br />

8. Respond to any warnings or errors as needed.<br />

9. From the Print work area, select each Printhead. Use the following<br />

lettered steps.<br />

a. If necessary, modify its information for Cue sensor, RIP, Mount,<br />

Color, and Page correlation.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

c. Select another printhead.<br />

10. From the Print work area, select each Cue sensor. Use the following<br />

lettered steps.<br />

a. If necessary, change the cue definition to match the Job Setup<br />

Sheet.<br />

b. Change the cue definition to match the Job Setup Sheet.<br />

c. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

11. From the Transport work area, select Unwind.<br />

a. Enable the module and set the unwind tension.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

2-40 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

12. From the Transport work area, select each Print tower.<br />

a. Enable the module.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

13. From the Transport work area, select each Dryer.<br />

a. Enable the module and set the dryer temperature.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

14. From the Transport work area, select each Turnbar<br />

a. Enable the module.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

15. From the Transport work area, select Rewind or another finishing<br />

option.<br />

a. Enable the module.<br />

b. Press Apply to save your changes.<br />

16. Go to “Printing Test Pages” on page 2-41 or “Printing a Print Job” on<br />

page 2-42.<br />

Printing Test Pages<br />

Use the following steps after the printheads have been brought to ready<br />

and after all cue sensors are properly positioned.<br />

1. Verify all printheads are ready for printing. At the system controller,<br />

the printhead icons should be green.<br />

2. At each print tower with an open cover, press UPPER COVER to close<br />

the cover.<br />

Note: Printing with the covers open causes a warning. If the warning is<br />

ignored, an error causes printing to stop.<br />

3. At print tower D, the Operator display, press Main.<br />

4. Verify that DRYER is in ready state.<br />

5. Verify that all persons are clear of the printing system.<br />

! DANGER<br />

The moving parts of the printing system can seriously injure persons who<br />

are not clear of the printing system.<br />

6. Press Ready at the bottom of the screen. An alarm will sound.<br />

7. Press Run slow or Run fast, as desired, within two seconds of the<br />

alarm.<br />

• If Run slow is pressed, the printing system runs at a preset slow<br />

speed.<br />

• If Run fast is pressed, the printing system runs at the printing<br />

speed that was used last.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-41


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

8. When the printing system has reached printing speed, use one of the<br />

following options:<br />

• If the printing system is set up for standard jobs (the transport and<br />

system controller share I/O), at the Operator display, print tower<br />

D, select Image test.<br />

• If the printing system is set up for testing (no I/O shared between<br />

the transport and system controller), at the system controller,<br />

select Print → Test pattern.<br />

9. If necessary, use “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45<br />

to move printheads into position for printing multi-color jobs.<br />

Printing a Print Job<br />

Use the following steps after the printheads have been brought to ready<br />

and they are properly registered, and after all cue sensors are properly<br />

positioned.<br />

1. If you are starting a new print job or changing the print job, perform<br />

“Setting Up a Print Job” on page 2-35.<br />

2. Verify all printheads are ready for printing. At the system controller,<br />

the printhead icons should be green.<br />

3. At each print tower with an open cover, press UPPER COVER to close<br />

the cover.<br />

Note: Printing with the covers open causes a warning. If the warning is<br />

ignored, an error causes printing to stop.<br />

4. At the system controller, select the print job with the following steps:<br />

CS600<br />

a. Select Start.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

(The computer operator is also known as the JES (job entry<br />

system) operator.)<br />

b. Go to step 5.<br />

CS400<br />

a. Select Job → Setup.<br />

b. Select the Type of the file, and identify the File path.<br />

c. Select APPLY.<br />

d. Go to step 5.<br />

CS300<br />

a. Select Ready.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

(The computer operator is also known as the JES (job entry<br />

system) operator.)<br />

b. Go to step 5.<br />

5. At print tower D, the Operator display, press Main.<br />

2-42 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

6. Verify that DRYER is in ready state.<br />

7. Verify that all persons are clear of the printing system.<br />

! DANGER<br />

Moving parts can seriously injure persons who are not clear of the printing<br />

system.<br />

CS220 8. Press Ready at the bottom of the screen. An alarm will sound.<br />

CS220 9. Press Run slow or Run fast, as desired, within two seconds of the<br />

alarm.<br />

• If Run slow is pressed, the printing system runs at a preset slow<br />

speed.<br />

• If Run fast is pressed, the printing system runs at the printing<br />

speed that was used last.<br />

CS220<br />

10. When the printing system has reached printing speed, use one of the<br />

following options:<br />

• If the printing system is set up for standard jobs (the transport and<br />

system controller share I/O) press Image data.<br />

• If the printing system is set up for testing (no I/O shared between<br />

the transport and system controller), at the system controller,<br />

select Print.<br />

11. You may need to make preliminary adjustments to cue delays to<br />

register printing at the same location on the web. (See “Adjusting the<br />

Data Registration” on page 2-43.)<br />

12. You may need to make final adjustments to printhead position to<br />

register color printing. (See “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on<br />

page 2-45.)<br />

Adjusting the Data Registration<br />

This procedure registers the print in the direction of web movement<br />

(upstream and downstream). You will first position the printhead(s) most<br />

upstream, and then position each printhead downstream from the last.<br />

All data positioning is controlled from the Operator display at the system<br />

controller. If the print job uses page correlation, the data registration must<br />

be more exact. Faulty data registration can cause page correlation errors<br />

that will stop printing of the job.<br />

1. If any printheads have been recently installed, or if any printhead<br />

interfaces have been changed or added, perform “Setting Printhead<br />

Skew” on page 2-28. The procedure adjusts skew for all the<br />

printheads in the printing system.<br />

2. If the system configuration has changed the locations of printheads or<br />

cue sensors, a key operator must perform “Setting the Cue Delays”<br />

on page 3-22.<br />

3. Start printing the print job (“Printing a Print Job” on page 2-42). Use a<br />

slow printing speed.<br />

4. Position the data printed in print tower A to lay ink where desired, with<br />

the following steps, depending on your controller:<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-43


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS400 and CS600<br />

These steps assume that the first printhead—the most upstream<br />

printhead in a grouping—is accurately positioned by measuring the<br />

distance from the cue sensor to the printhead. The steps adjust the<br />

positions of all downstream printheads to the first.<br />

a. At the system controller, select Print and the next printhead<br />

downstream.<br />

b. Enter the following information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Used by<br />

printer<br />

Cue sensor<br />

Cue delay<br />

Speed<br />

compensation<br />

As marked<br />

Selected in the Job → MPC screen.<br />

A, B, C, or D Identity of the cue sensor immediately<br />

upstream of this printhead. (A is most<br />

upstream.)<br />

As measured<br />

on the web<br />

0.10 or as<br />

measured<br />

Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

See “Calculating the Speed Comp Value”<br />

on page 3-27.<br />

Registration 0.0 This will be changed later.<br />

c. Save your entries for each printhead by selecting Apply.<br />

d. Go to step 5.<br />

CS300<br />

These steps assume that the first printhead—the most upstream<br />

printhead in a grouping—is accurately positioned by measuring the<br />

distance from the cue sensor to the printhead. The steps adjust the<br />

positions of all downstream printheads to the first.<br />

a. At the system controller, select Transport, and the next<br />

printhead downstream.<br />

b. Enter the following information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Enable As marked Selected in the Job → MPC screen.<br />

Cue sensor<br />

A, B, C, or D Identity of the cue sensor immediately<br />

upstream of this printhead. (A is most<br />

upstream.)<br />

Cue delay<br />

Speed<br />

compensation<br />

As measured<br />

on the web<br />

0.10 or as<br />

measured<br />

Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

See “Calculating the Speed Comp Value”<br />

on page 3-27.<br />

2-44 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Registration 0.0 This will be changed later.<br />

Mount Front or back Front is OS, back is GS.<br />

Position As measured The offset from normal print position.<br />

Color As entered Selected in the Job → Colors screen.<br />

Page<br />

correlation<br />

As entered<br />

This will be changed later.<br />

c. Save your entries for each printhead by selecting Apply.<br />

d. Go to step 5.<br />

CS220<br />

These steps assume that the first printhead—the most upstream<br />

printhead in a grouping—is accurately positioned by measuring the<br />

distance from the cue sensor to the printhead. The steps adjust the<br />

positions of all downstream printheads to the first.<br />

a. At the system controller, select Print → Registration.<br />

b. Select the printhead.<br />

c. Adjust the slider to move the printed data to the correct position,<br />

toward or away from the preprinted cue mark and other<br />

preprinted material.<br />

d. Go to step 5.<br />

5. Check the print position from each printhead in comparison to the<br />

preprinted cue mark, other preprinted material, and printing from<br />

other upstream printheads. Use one of the following bullets:<br />

• If the print position of the selected printhead is not correct in<br />

reference to the prior printhead(s), repeat from step 4.b (step 4.c<br />

for CS220) for the same printhead.<br />

• If the print position is correct, repeat from step 4.a for each of the<br />

next printheads downstream.<br />

6. Go to “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45 to continue<br />

system operations.<br />

Adjusting the Printhead Registration<br />

This procedure registers the print across the web (OS and GS). You will<br />

first position the printhead(s) most upstream, and then position each<br />

printhead downstream from the last.<br />

All printhead movement is controlled from the Operator display at print<br />

tower D. For best results, perform “Adjusting the Data Registration” on<br />

page 2-43 before using the following steps.<br />

1. Start printing the print job (“Printing a Print Job” on page 2-42).<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-45


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

2. Position the printheads in print tower A to lay ink where desired, with<br />

the following steps:<br />

a. At the Operator display at print tower D, press Registration.<br />

b. Select the printhead by pressing one of the printhead buttons.<br />

c. Enter a value for the distance to move the printhead.<br />

d. If desired, press Inch or mm to change to the alternate unit of<br />

measurement.<br />

e. Press OS or GS. The printhead moves immediately.<br />

3. Check the print on the web, and repeat from step 2.a for each of the<br />

next printheads. Check the print position from each printhead in<br />

comparison to the printing from other upstream printheads.<br />

Note: Do not move printheads in the upstream print towers once they have<br />

been registered.<br />

4. Go to one of the following procedures to continue system operations:<br />

• “Printing a Print Job” on page 2-42<br />

• “Adjusting the Duplexed Registration” on page 2-46<br />

• “Setting Up Page Correlation” on page 2-48<br />

• “Saving the Job Settings” on page 2-52.<br />

Adjusting the Duplexed Registration<br />

In some cases, stopping printing while running a duplex print job can<br />

result in mismatched documents on the two faces of the web. Use the<br />

following steps to correct the duplex product. For best results, perform<br />

“Adjusting the Data Registration” on page 2-43 before using the following<br />

steps.<br />

1. Check the completed product at the rewind unit, and discard all<br />

product that is mismatched front-to-back.<br />

2. At the system controller, perform the following lettered steps:<br />

CS600<br />

a. Select Print → Clear buffers.<br />

b. Ask your computer operator to perform a backspace command to<br />

start at or before the last document that was printed correctly.<br />

c. Select Ready.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

d. Go to step 3.<br />

CS400<br />

Normally the controller will select the last completed document and<br />

restart on the next document. If a different restarting document is<br />

needed, use the following steps.<br />

a. Back through the data to the last correctly printed product.<br />

b. Resume printing the job.<br />

c. Go to step 3.<br />

2-46 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS300<br />

a. Select Print → Clear buffers.<br />

b. Enter the new starting document number and, if desired, an<br />

ending document number.<br />

c. Ask your computer operator to perform a backspace command to<br />

start at or before the last document that was printed correctly.<br />

d. Select Ready.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

e. Go to step 3.<br />

3. Resume printing the job.<br />

4. After the spoiled product has cleared the printing system, discard the<br />

spoiled product, and splice in the correctly printed web.<br />

5. Resume printing the print job.<br />

Reprinting Data<br />

It will be necessary to reprint some data when checking the registration or<br />

when seeing other print problems. Use the following steps:<br />

1. Select Fast stop to stop printing.<br />

2. If a problem with a module exists, correct the problem.<br />

3. Check the completed product at the rewind unit, and discard all<br />

product that is mismatched front-to-back.<br />

CS600 & CS400<br />

CS300<br />

CS220<br />

4. Determine the last document that was printed correctly.<br />

Refer to the Job Setup Sheet to determine the document count<br />

(CS600, CS400, and CS220) or piece count (CS300). For example, a<br />

single page, document, piece, or form may be a single address, or it<br />

can be print to fill an area of 17.92 x 11.0 inches on both sides of the<br />

web. In some cases, it can be even more printed output than the<br />

examples given. Usually each cue mark causes a document or piece<br />

to print.<br />

The document count displayed is the last completely printed<br />

document.<br />

The piece count displayed is the last completely printed piece.<br />

The document count displayed is the last completely printed<br />

document.<br />

5. At the system controller, perform the following lettered steps:<br />

CS600<br />

a. Select Print → Clear buffers.<br />

b. Enter the new starting document number and, if desired, an<br />

ending document number.<br />

c. Ask your computer operator to perform a backspace command to<br />

start at or before the last document that was printed correctly.<br />

d. Select Ready.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

e. Go to step 6.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-47


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS400<br />

a. Back through the data to the last correctly printed product.<br />

b. Resume printing the job.<br />

c. Go to step 6.<br />

CS300<br />

a. Select Print → Clear buffers.<br />

b. Ask your computer operator to perform a backspace command to<br />

start at or before the last document that was printed correctly.<br />

c. Select Ready.<br />

The job will start when your computer operator sends the job.<br />

d. Go to step 6.<br />

6. After the spoiled product has cleared the printing system, discard the<br />

spoiled product, and splice in the correctly printed web.<br />

7. Resume printing the print job.<br />

Setting Up Page Correlation<br />

A group of four sensors downstream from the last printhead provide page<br />

correlation (Figure 2.40) with the CS300 and CS400 controllers. (Page<br />

correlation is not available for CS220. Page correlation is a future release<br />

for the CS600.)<br />

The most useful size of a page correlation mark is 0.125 high by 0.25<br />

inches wide (0.318 by 0.635 cm) to avoid false errors from any web<br />

wandering and to conserve space in the non-used product that is usually<br />

not in the final piece. The smallest allowable size is 0.125 tall by 0.125<br />

inches wide, and the largest allowable size is 0.25 by 8.96 inches,<br />

assuming the mark is placed at the 0 position of the width.<br />

Use the following steps for setting up and using page correlation:<br />

1. Perform “Adjusting the Data Registration” on page 2-43.<br />

2. Perform “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45.<br />

3. If necessary, perform “Adjusting the Duplexed Registration” on page<br />

2-46.<br />

2-48 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS400 and CS600<br />

4. At the system controller, select Transport → Page, and then use the<br />

Page Correlation screen to configure the feature:<br />

a. With the Check Page Correlation checkbox, disable the page<br />

correlation feature. (You will enable the feature at a later point.)<br />

b. With the Generate Marks button, enable printing of page correlation<br />

marks by printheads, if desired. Disable printing of page<br />

correlation marks if the substrate has preprinted marks.<br />

c. If the Generate Numbers button is active, enable or disable printing<br />

a document number along with the page correlation marks.<br />

d. In the Position field, enter the location from the first line of the<br />

document where the page correlation mark is printed. Usually the<br />

location should be 1 /8 inch or further down the page.<br />

e. In the Height field, enter the size of each segment of the page<br />

correlation mark. This value can be 0.125 ( 1 /8) to 0.25 inch wide<br />

(0.318 to 0.635 cm).<br />

f. In the Distance field, enter the distance of the sensors from the<br />

first cue sensor. (This distance is best determined with “Setting<br />

the Cue Delays” on page 3-22.)<br />

g. With the Sensor polarity buttons, select the sensor polarity to<br />

invert the polarity. Leaving the polarity unchecked is more<br />

common.<br />

h. Select Apply.<br />

5. At the system controller, select Print and a printhead that prints<br />

black ink, and then use the Print screen to configure the printhead:<br />

a. In the Mark Position field, enter the location from the GS edge of<br />

the printed document where the page correlation mark is printed.<br />

Usually the location should be 0.125 ( 1 /8) inch (0.318 cm) or<br />

further from the left edge of the printhead, but the value is allowed<br />

to be 0.0 to 8.96 inches (0.0 to 22.76 cm).<br />

b. In the Mark Width field, enter the size of the page correlation<br />

mark.<br />

Usually this value is at least 0.125 ( 1 /8) inch, and usually 0.25<br />

inch wide (0.318 and 0.635 cm). The mark can be as narrow as<br />

0.063 inch ( 1 /16 inch, 0.159 cm) and as wide as the printhead<br />

(8.96 inches, 22.76 cm). Sizes at the extremes of the range may<br />

facilitate page correlation errors due to substrate wandering<br />

underneath the sensors.<br />

c. With the Sensor buttons, select the sensor that will detect the<br />

marks printed by—or preprinted for—this printhead. Select Not<br />

used if the page correlation marks can be ignored for this printhead<br />

and others in line with it.<br />

d. Select APPLY.<br />

6. Repeat step 5 for each printhead that prints black, then go to step 10.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-49


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

CS300<br />

7. At the system controller, select Transport and Page, and then use<br />

the Page Correlation screen to configure the feature:<br />

a. With the Check Page Correlation checkbox, disable the page<br />

correlation feature. (You will enable the feature at a later point.)<br />

b. With the Generate Marks button, enable printing of page correlation<br />

marks by printheads, if desired. Disable printing of page<br />

correlation marks if the substrate has preprinted marks.<br />

c. If the Generate Numbers button is active, enable or disable<br />

printing a document number along with the page correlation<br />

marks.<br />

d. In the Position field, enter the location from the first line of the<br />

document where the page correlation mark is printed. Usually the<br />

location should be 1 /8 inch or further down the page.<br />

e. In the Height field, enter the size of each segment of the page<br />

correlation mark. This value can be 0.125 ( 1 /8) to 0.25 inch wide<br />

(0.318 to 0.635 cm).<br />

f. In the Distance field, enter the distance of the sensors from the<br />

first cue sensor. (This distance is best determined with “Setting<br />

the Cue Delays” on page 3-22.)<br />

g. With the Sensor polarity buttons, select the sensor polarity to<br />

invert the polarity. Leaving the polarity unchecked is more<br />

common.<br />

h. Select Apply.<br />

8. At the system controller, select TRANSPORT and a printhead that<br />

prints black ink, and then use the Page correlation area to configure<br />

the printhead:<br />

a. In the Mark Position field, enter the location from the GS edge of<br />

the printed document where the page correlation mark is printed.<br />

Usually the location should be 0.125 ( 1 /8) inch (0.318 cm) or<br />

further from the left edge of the printhead, but the value is allowed<br />

to be 0.0 to 8.96 inches (0.0 to 22.76 cm).<br />

b. In the Mark Width field, enter the size of the page correlation<br />

mark.<br />

Usually this value is at least 0.125 ( 1 /8) inch, and usually 0.25<br />

inch wide (0.318 and 0.635 cm). The mark can be as narrow as<br />

0.063 inch ( 1 /16 inch, 0.159 cm) and as wide as the printhead<br />

(8.96 inches, 22.76 cm). Sizes at the extremes of the range may<br />

facilitate page correlation errors due to substrate wandering<br />

underneath the sensors.<br />

c. With the Sensor buttons, select the sensor that will detect the<br />

marks printed by—or preprinted for—this printhead. Select NOT<br />

USED if the page correlation marks can be ignored for this printhead<br />

and others in line with it.<br />

d. Select Apply.<br />

2-50 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

9. Repeat step 8 for each printhead that prints black, then go to step 10.<br />

10. Use one of the following actions:<br />

• If the printheads are to print correlation marks, start the job and<br />

print documents until a correlation mark should be detected by<br />

each used sensor.<br />

• If the web has preprinted correlation marks, jog the web to bring<br />

page correlation marks to all used sensors.<br />

11. Use “Positioning the Page Correlation Sensors” on page 2-51 for<br />

each correlation sensor.<br />

Positioning the Page Correlation Sensors<br />

Four page correlation sensors are on a double rail just downstream from<br />

the last printhead (Figure 2.40). Use the following steps to adjust the<br />

sensor positions across the web.<br />

Figure 2.40<br />

Page correlation sensor location, print tower D<br />

Page corr. sensors<br />

for front<br />

Knobs<br />

Page corr. sensors<br />

for back<br />

1. Perform the steps in “Setting Up Page Correlation” on page 2-48.<br />

2. At print tower D, rotate a knob to move a sensor to its correlation<br />

mark.<br />

• Rotate the knob left to move the sensor to GS.<br />

• Rotate right to move it OS.<br />

3. Repeat step 2 for each used sensor.<br />

4. If necessary, go to “Adjusting the Cue Sensor” on page 3-19 to<br />

continue cue sensor setup.<br />

5. Print the job at a slow speed, and check each sensor for detecting the<br />

page correlation marks.<br />

6. If necessary, use step 2 again to fine-tune the sensor position.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-51


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

7. At the system controller, select Transport and Page. Then select the<br />

Check page correlation button to enable the page correlation feature.<br />

CS300<br />

CS600 & CS400<br />

Note: It is possible to enable and disable individual sensors for careful<br />

positioning.<br />

Select Transport and a printhead.<br />

Select Print and a printhead.<br />

8. At the system controller, set the starting document to where you want<br />

to start printing with page correlation.<br />

9. Perform “Saving the Job Settings” on page 2-52.<br />

10. Resume printing the job.<br />

Saving the Job Settings<br />

Perform the following steps:<br />

1. Select Application.<br />

2. Select File.<br />

3. Select Save to use the existing file name or Save as... to name a new<br />

file.<br />

Recovering From an Emergency Stop<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. If you have pressed an EMERGENCY STOP button, twist the<br />

EMERGENCY STOP knob clockwise. The knob springs out to the<br />

original position.<br />

2. At print tower D, check the Operator display for any errors.<br />

• If the screen has a red Error, press the button to display an Error<br />

screen.<br />

• If the screen has a red Alarm, press the button to display the<br />

Error setting screen.<br />

• All error screens and corrective actions for the transport are<br />

discussed in Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting”.<br />

• Errors and corrective actions for the controller are discussed in<br />

online help.<br />

3. Correct the error condition, or call a key operator or service person to<br />

perform the following actions:<br />

• Resetting breaker switches<br />

• Checking for clutch failure<br />

• Checking for relay failure.<br />

4. At the Operator display, perform the following steps if Fast stop is red<br />

or flashing red:<br />

a. Press Fast stop. The button will flash on and off.<br />

b. Press EMERG. RESET to reset the transport.<br />

c. Press Fast stop. The button will return to its normal color.<br />

2-52 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

5. At the rewind unit, reduce the TENSION SETTING to 0.<br />

6. Select GRIPPER OFF.<br />

7. Allow the dancer roller to go to its lowest position, then select TENSION<br />

ON.<br />

8. Select Ready, then select Jog, and allow the core to reach five or<br />

more rotations.<br />

9. Increase the TENSION METER reading to a setting for the paper.<br />

(Standard paper is setting 11 for an 11-inch web, lighter paper may be<br />

a setting of 5.)<br />

10. Still at the rewind unit, select Ready, and then select Run slow.<br />

11. At an Operator display, use one of the following alternatives:<br />

• Select Run fast to resume printing at full speed.<br />

• Select a new speed (“Selecting a New Printing Speed” on page<br />

2-53).<br />

12. Go to a step in “Overview” on page 2-1 to continue system<br />

operations.<br />

Selecting a New Printing Speed<br />

You can select a new speed at the Operator display in print tower D or at<br />

the controller.<br />

Note: When the printing system has an active controller, the printing speed<br />

controls are delayed by a few seconds at print tower D.<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the Main screen, Operator display, print tower D, use one of the<br />

following steps:<br />

• Select a speed shown as a Job speed button.<br />

• Press a Job speed arrow to increase or decrease the speed.<br />

2. Continue system operations.<br />

Turning the Printing System Off<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the operator display or system controller, select Stop to stop the<br />

job and stop printing.<br />

2. At the operator display, from the Main screen, select Dryer and then<br />

Off to turn off the dryer.<br />

3. At the rewind unit, select GRIPPER ON to maintain the web tension.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-53


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

4. Use the following options for placing the print stations in a standby<br />

condition. Refer to the DT9000 series print stations Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

for additional information.<br />

• Idle time from 1 to 4 hours<br />

Normally, leave the printhead in Ready.<br />

Or place the printheads in Clean Mode, with the following lettered<br />

steps. You will leave the print station powered on.<br />

a. Select PSI from the subsystem bar.<br />

b. Select the appropriate Printhead from the subsystem bar.<br />

c. From the work area, select Clean.<br />

d. Repeat these steps for each printhead.<br />

e. Go to step 5.<br />

• Idle time from 4 hours to 88 hours (3 days and 16 hours)<br />

Place the printheads in Wakeup Mode, with the following lettered<br />

steps. You will leave the print station powered on.<br />

a. Check the external supply of ink. Each print station in<br />

wakeup mode requires 0.4 L ( 1 /2 qt) ink for each 8 hours. A<br />

normal weekend requires nearly 3 L ( 3 /4 gallon) per print<br />

station that uses the same ink. If any ink supplies are low,<br />

replace the supply using “Replacing an Empty Ink Container”<br />

in the print station Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

b. From the subsystem bar, select PSI.<br />

c. From the function bar, select Wakeup, which displays the<br />

Wakeup screen.<br />

Print station check box<br />

2-54 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

d. In the work area, specify the printheads to be placed in sleep<br />

mode:<br />

• To select a specific printhead, click on the appropriate<br />

printhead check box.<br />

• To select all connected printheads, select Select All.<br />

• To clear all selected printheads, select Clear All.<br />

Note: Any printheads not selected for wakeup are left in their current states.<br />

e. From the Wakeup Time spin box, select the time and use<br />

the arrows to change the time value. The startup time must<br />

be greater than 30 minutes from the current time.<br />

f. From the Startup Date drop-down list, select the arrow to<br />

display the month view calendar. The current date is circled<br />

in red.<br />

g. Select the date when the idle period should end. The startup<br />

date can be set up to three days and two shifts (88 hours) in<br />

advance.<br />

h. Select Enable.<br />

The print station begins bringing the selected printheads to<br />

XFLUSH. The Wakeup status will read ENABLED and show<br />

the time remaining until startup.<br />

Note: Some errors that can occur during this mode will prevent bringing the<br />

printhead to SERVCLEAN when the wakeup time is reached.<br />

i. To start printing at the end of the wakeup period, go to<br />

“Completing Wakeup Mode” in the print station Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

j. Go to step 5.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-55


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

• Idle time for more than 3 days<br />

Bring all printheads to SHUTDOWN. You may power off the print<br />

station when the printhead state is ALL OFF.<br />

a. If the printhead is in catch and the catchpan is not<br />

installed, close the eyelid before attempting to shut<br />

down a printhead. Refer to “Changing Eyelid Positions”<br />

in the print station Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

b. From the subsystem bar, select PSI.<br />

c. From the function bar, select Summary.<br />

d. Select Shutdown All.<br />

During the shutdown sequence, SHUTDOWNPRG<br />

appears in the Sequence text field. When shutdown is<br />

complete, “0” appears in the Time Remaining text field,<br />

and “Finished” appears in the Sequence text field.<br />

After the shutdown sequence is complete, the printhead<br />

is placed in ALLOFF state, as shown in the Sequence<br />

text field.<br />

e. Go to step 5.<br />

5. Use one of the following options:<br />

Idle time is less than 3 days<br />

Leave the controller running. The controller must remain active<br />

to respond to any printer errors and to wake up printers at the<br />

desired time.<br />

Stop turning the printing system off here.<br />

Do not turn off any print stations or the controller.<br />

CS220<br />

a. If the idle time is more than 3 days, allow the shutdown to<br />

complete.<br />

b. At the system controller, quit the PSI software.<br />

c. Turn off the system controller computer.<br />

d. Go to step 6.<br />

CS300 CS400 & CS600<br />

a. If the idle time is more than 3 days, select Application.<br />

b. Select Shutdown.<br />

2-56 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Print Job Operations<br />

c. Select Begin shutdown.<br />

After you confirm the selection, the controller initiates the<br />

shutdown sequence for all printheads.<br />

During the shutdown sequence, if you are monitoring the<br />

process from the PSI screen, SHUTDOWNPRG appears in<br />

the Sequence text field. When shutdown is complete, “0”<br />

appears in the Time Remaining text field, and “Finished”<br />

appears in the Sequence text field.<br />

After the shutdown sequence is complete, the printhead is<br />

placed in ALLOFF state, as shown in the Sequence text<br />

field.<br />

d. Allow the shutdown to complete.<br />

e. Select Shutdown controller.<br />

After you confirm the selection, the controller shuts down<br />

the software and, depending on your settings, the operating<br />

system.<br />

f. When notified by the computer operating system, shut off<br />

the controller.<br />

g. Go to step 6.<br />

6. At the control box, turn both switches off (Figure 2.41).<br />

7. If the printing system has a second control box or a transformer, turn<br />

off the power switches at these units.<br />

Figure 2.41<br />

Main switches, control box<br />

200-V power switch<br />

400-V power switch<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-57


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Unwind Unit Operations<br />

Unwind Unit Operations<br />

The following procedures are presented in other parts of this Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>:<br />

• “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Unwind Unit” on page 2-4<br />

• “Webbing the Unwind Unit” on page 2-10<br />

• “Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12<br />

• Setting the position and tension of gripper rollers. Refer to “Adjusting<br />

the Gripper Rollers” on page 2-14<br />

• “Jogging the Web” on page 2-14<br />

• “Positioning the Web Break Sensor” on page 2-32.<br />

Setting the Roll End Detection<br />

Roll end detection sets up stopping a print job before the unwind roll is<br />

empty. With roll end detection, roll changes can be done without needing<br />

to reweb the unwind unit. Use the following steps:<br />

1. At the unwind unit, select ROLLEND ON.<br />

2. At the Operator display, print tower D, select APU.<br />

3. Select PAPER END to display the Paper end screen.<br />

4. Select APU.<br />

5. In the Roll end section of the screen, select Stop or Run slow.<br />

• Stop causes the printing system to stop at the end of the roll.<br />

• Run slow causes the printing system to slow down.<br />

6. Check the position of the roll end sensor, and move it if necessary to<br />

a location near the paper core.<br />

Figure 2.42<br />

Positioning end of roll sensor<br />

Versions 1 & 2 Version 3<br />

End of roll sensor<br />

7. Continue printing the job.<br />

2-58 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 2. Basic Operations<br />

Rewind Unit Operations<br />

8. When the Paper end error occurs near the end of the roll, stop<br />

printing and change the roll (“Loading and Unloading Paper at the<br />

Unwind Unit” on page 2-4).<br />

9. At the Operator display, print tower D, press OK or MAIN to clear the<br />

error and resume printing.<br />

Rewind Unit Operations<br />

The following procedures are presented in other parts of this Operator’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>:<br />

• “Loading and Unloading Paper at the Rewind Unit” on page 2-8<br />

• “Webbing the Rewind Unit” on page 2-20<br />

• “Adjusting the Web <strong>Guide</strong>” on page 2-12<br />

• Setting the position and tension of gripper rollers. Refer to “Adjusting<br />

the Gripper Rollers” on page 2-14<br />

• “Jogging the Web” on page 2-14<br />

• “Positioning the Web Break Sensor” on page 2-32<br />

• “Selecting the Motor Direction” on page 2-22<br />

• “Tightening the Web” on page 2-23.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 2-59


Chapter 3.<br />

Advanced Operations<br />

The procedures in this chapter are appropriate for key operators and<br />

service technicians who have received training in advanced procedures.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-1


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

The identifying of a printhead involves three modules—the print tower, the<br />

print stations, and the system controller—and the cabling between these<br />

modules. Each of the modules identifies the printheads in a unique way.<br />

The correct printhead numbering can help you identify which printhead is<br />

connected to a given print station, and the numbering can indicate which<br />

part of the job file provides information for printing at that printhead. This<br />

section shows how setting up each module in support of the printing<br />

system can simplify the printhead numbering.<br />

Baseline System Numbering<br />

A baseline printing system with two print towers and no upgrades can<br />

have up to four printheads. The printheads are numbered 1 through 4<br />

usually, and printhead 1 is the first to print on the web. Figure 3.1 shows<br />

the suggested printhead positions and identities when the printing system<br />

is printing single-page process color and each printhead provides a<br />

different color.<br />

Figure 3.1<br />

Printhead numbering, baseline system<br />

C<br />

1<br />

1A<br />

M<br />

2<br />

2A<br />

K<br />

3<br />

3A<br />

Y<br />

4<br />

4A<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

In a process color configuration, the order of color printing is cyan (C)<br />

from printhead 1, followed by magenta (M), black (K), and yellow (Y). The<br />

Printhead summary screen identifies the same printheads as 1A, 2A, 3A,<br />

and 4A. These identities use a number for the print station and a letter for<br />

the printhead. Thus this configuration has four print stations, each with<br />

one printhead.<br />

The configuration of two print towers can be used for printing two colors<br />

two-up also, but the numbering of the printheads changes to identify the<br />

colors and printhead locations (Figure 3.2): 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B. The<br />

configuration has two print stations, each with two printheads.<br />

3-2 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

Figure 3.2<br />

Printhead numbering for 2-up, 2-color<br />

K L<br />

1<br />

1A<br />

K R<br />

2<br />

1B<br />

S L<br />

3<br />

2A<br />

S R<br />

4<br />

2B<br />

K = Black<br />

S = Spot<br />

R=Right<br />

L=Left<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

The same configuration can use the turnbar and the same numbering for<br />

printing two colors over two colors (2 over 2, Figure 3.3). In this<br />

configuration, printhead 1A places black ink on the obverse (the front<br />

side, shown with the black path), and 1B prints black on the reverse after<br />

the web has gone through the turnbar, shown with the gray path.<br />

Figure 3.3<br />

Webbing and numbering for 1-up; 2-over-2-color<br />

K = Black<br />

S = Spot<br />

R=Reverse<br />

O=Obverse<br />

K O<br />

1<br />

1A<br />

K R<br />

2<br />

1B<br />

S O<br />

3<br />

2A<br />

S R<br />

4<br />

2B<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-3


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

Eight-Rail Numbering<br />

Print towers B and C can be part of the printing system. The print towers<br />

are located between print towers A and D. This configuration can provide<br />

two standard alternatives to use with process color:<br />

• Duplex process color (4 over 4, Figure 3.4)<br />

• Two-up process color (4-C 2-up, Figure 3.5).<br />

In both cases, four print stations with two printheads each are used.<br />

Figure 3.4<br />

C = Cyan<br />

M=Magenta<br />

K = Black<br />

Y = Yellow<br />

Webbing and numbering for duplex 4-color<br />

C O M O K O Y O<br />

1 2<br />

3 4<br />

1A 2A 3A 4A<br />

C R M R K R Y R<br />

5 6<br />

7 8<br />

1B 2B 3B 4B<br />

Page Corr.<br />

R = Reverse<br />

O = Obverse<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Figure 3.5<br />

C = Cyan<br />

M=Magenta<br />

K = Black<br />

Y = Yellow<br />

Webbing and numbering for 2-up 4-color<br />

C L M L K L Y L<br />

1 2<br />

3 4<br />

1A 1B 2A 2B<br />

C R M R K R Y R<br />

5 6<br />

7 8<br />

3A 3B 4A 4B<br />

R = Right<br />

L = Left<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

3-4 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

Figure 3.6<br />

Alternative numbering for 2-up 4-color<br />

Best registration occurs when the four colors are printed by adjacent<br />

printheads. However, specific applications may use a third arrangement<br />

of how the print is laid (Figure 3.6).<br />

C = Cyan<br />

M=Magenta<br />

K = Black<br />

Y = Yellow<br />

C L C R M L M R<br />

1 2<br />

3 4<br />

1A 1B 2A 2B<br />

K L K R Y L Y R<br />

5 6<br />

7 8<br />

3A 3B 4A 4B<br />

R = Right<br />

L = Left<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Other types of printing jobs can also be completed with the same<br />

configurations. However, printing more than four colors before drying is<br />

not recommended.<br />

Figure 3.7<br />

Multiple Print Bank Numbering<br />

The VX5000 printing system may be purchased with two banks of print<br />

towers, or the printing system may be upgraded at any time to add print<br />

towers. Customers often prefer to upgrade in steps from four printheads<br />

to eight, and from eight printheads to twelve or sixteen.<br />

The upgrade to twelve printheads requires a fifth and a sixth print tower.<br />

The configuration allows printing a single-color reverse—usually black—<br />

in a duplex print job, which can make use of two printheads that use the<br />

same color ink from one print station (Figure 3.7). The configuration also<br />

allows printing black and a spot color.<br />

Printhead numbering, 12-printhead system<br />

K = Black<br />

S = Spot<br />

K L<br />

1<br />

1A<br />

R=Right<br />

L =Left<br />

K R<br />

2<br />

1B<br />

S L<br />

3<br />

2A<br />

S R<br />

4<br />

2B<br />

C = Cyan<br />

M=Magenta<br />

K = Black<br />

Y = Yellow<br />

C L M L K L Y L<br />

5 6 7 8<br />

3A 3B 4A 4B<br />

R = Right<br />

L = Left<br />

C R M R K R Y R<br />

9 10 11 12<br />

5A 5B 6A 6B<br />

Page Corr.<br />

Web cleaner<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-5


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

The upgrade to sixteen printheads requires a seventh and an eighth print<br />

tower. Printhead locations may use configurations similar to those<br />

discussed already, but for use on the reverse of a two-up, duplex process<br />

color print job (Figure 3.8).<br />

Figure 3.8<br />

Printhead numbering, 16-printhead system<br />

R = Right<br />

L = Left<br />

C L M L K L Y L<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

1A 1B 2A 2B<br />

C R M R K R Y R<br />

5 6 7 8<br />

3A 3B 4A 4B<br />

C = Cyan<br />

M=Magenta<br />

K = Black<br />

Y = Yellow<br />

C L M L K L Y L<br />

9 10 11 12<br />

5A 5B 6A 6B<br />

R = Right<br />

L = Left<br />

C R M R K R Y R<br />

13 14 15 16<br />

7A 7B 8A 8B<br />

Page Cor<br />

Web cleaner<br />

The eight print towers also provide many other alternatives, using a<br />

mixture of spot colors laid out in simplex or duplex, one-up or two-up<br />

formats. The job may use three different colors, with two printheads laying<br />

ink that is the same color as other printheads, or as many as eight<br />

different colors.<br />

This section does not describe all possible printhead configurations and<br />

print job requirements.<br />

Adding a Printhead to the Configuration<br />

Printheads must be identified in the following three places for correct use<br />

in a printing job:<br />

• In the PSI configuration<br />

• In the current job<br />

• In the displayed model of the printing system.<br />

If a printhead is not identified in all three places, an error or warning may<br />

alert you to a problem, or expected controls for the printhead will be<br />

unavailable. Identifying the printhead in the PSI configuration is typically<br />

in the hands of the persons who install and set up the printing system.<br />

Identifying the printhead in the job is in the hands of the persons who<br />

build the print job and its data.<br />

The following steps focus on the direct controls that an operator has, and<br />

the procedure should be needed only after installing an additional<br />

printhead to the printing system.<br />

1. Ask your service person to check all print stations for their INet<br />

addresses and to enter the addresses in the PSI → Config screen.<br />

2. At the controller, select Transport → Model, and add the printhead(s)<br />

at the proper location(s) in the system schematic.<br />

3-6 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

3. Select Print, and verify that the printhead appears in the correct<br />

location in the schematic.<br />

4. Select the Printhead, and perform the following steps to define the<br />

printhead:<br />

a. Select the Cue sensor that the printhead’s cue delay is<br />

measured from.<br />

b. Enter the Cue delay. “Setting the Cue Delays” on page 3-22<br />

describes measuring the cue delay.<br />

c. Enter a Speed compensation value, if known. “Calculating the<br />

Speed Comp Value” on page 3-27 describes the process.<br />

d. Enter a Registration value, if required.<br />

CS600 & CS400 e. Verify the data station and RIP assignment.<br />

CS300 f. Select Front or Back for the printhead position.<br />

g. Enter a mount Position, if known.<br />

CS600 & CS400 h. If the printhead is a 1” or 4” printhead, define the Tower, Rail, and<br />

Bucket.<br />

i. Verify the ink Color that the printhead prints.<br />

j. If Page correlation is used, enter a Mark position (its height), a<br />

Mark width, and select a Sensor that reads the page correlation<br />

mark.<br />

k. Select Apply.<br />

5. Go to “Enabling an Existing Printhead” on page 2-29 if the printhead<br />

is to be used in the current print job.<br />

Using an MPC Manual Setup<br />

This section will be provided at a later date.<br />

When an MPC job is loaded, the job parameters are provided to the<br />

controller. It is possible to modify some parameters for customizing the<br />

job. This section will document the modifications that are available.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-7


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

Setting Up Printing for the CS300<br />

Setting up a process-color job or a job that prints spot color from data<br />

supplied to a CS300 is a part of job setup. You will find the full job setup<br />

process in “Setting Up a Print Job” on page 2-35. Setting up the CS300<br />

job demands the skills of an experienced graphic arts operator, because<br />

the CS300 allows you to tune the printed color to a very fine degree. This<br />

section guides use of the Job subsystem.<br />

1. Select Forms. Select a form from the options shown. If the desired<br />

form is not shown, create a new form or change one of the existing<br />

forms by using the following lettered steps.<br />

3-8 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

a. On the New form screen or Change form screen, enter a<br />

descriptive name for the form. Then set the dimensions and the<br />

location for the top left corner of the page. In the Cut sheet block,<br />

determine how the pages of the document should be handled<br />

while they are being printed.<br />

Figure 3.9<br />

Cut sheet modes<br />

1 2 2 1<br />

Force left/right<br />

Force right/left<br />

1 2 2 1<br />

Force inverted left/right<br />

Force inverted right/left<br />

GS<br />

1<br />

OS<br />

Web direction<br />

2 3<br />

Incoming 1-up<br />

IPDS data stream<br />

to CS300<br />

b. The Reserved button selects a special swapping arrangement<br />

that forces inverted left/right on the back side and forces noninverted<br />

right/left on the front side.<br />

2. If the Job Setup Sheet indicates that the job data requires color<br />

printheads, select Transport → Setup → Printhead to identify colors<br />

available for the front and back printheads. This information is used in<br />

step 3.<br />

Note: Print stations built after 2003 automatically report the ink installed<br />

and its color, and this step can be used to verify the settings. Some<br />

older print stations that do not report the ink require this step for<br />

accurate recording of the ink used by a printhead.<br />

3. Select Colors. Map the system colors used in the Job Setup Shee to<br />

printheads printing on the front or back of the web.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-9


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

For each system color to which you assign printhead colors, your<br />

selection of a printhead color will select all printheads printing that<br />

color on one side of the web. If your printing system has CMKY<br />

printheads, the most workable settings are shown in the following<br />

table.<br />

System color Front Back<br />

Cyan Cyan Cyan<br />

Magenta Magenta Magenta<br />

Black Black Black<br />

Yellow Yellow Yellow<br />

All others Black Black<br />

a. Select a System color.<br />

b. Press the Front or Back color button until the correct color is<br />

selected.<br />

c. Repeat step a and step b for any number of System colors.<br />

• Exactly sixteen System colors are available, as listed on the<br />

screen.<br />

• System colors are identified in the job data for specific portions of<br />

the printed product. For example, a company logo may be printed<br />

always with System color Dark Blue, and when the logo appears<br />

in the data, it is assigned that System color.<br />

• Because the System color is mapped here to an ink color and a<br />

printhead, the data that is printed may or may not be the same<br />

color as the selected System color.<br />

• If your printhead configuration supports it, the same System color<br />

may be provided the same or different printhead colors on the<br />

back and front.<br />

• If an ink color does not exist for a match to a System color, your<br />

Job Setup Sheet may guide your selections here.<br />

3-10 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

4. Select Setup. Select the print options from the options shown.<br />

a. Select an IPDS resolution, which should be listed in the Job<br />

Sheet. Selecting Auto resolution may be used if the IPDS<br />

resolution is not known.<br />

b. Select a Print resolution. Only two choices are allowed.<br />

c. Enable or disable Clear memory for security. If selected, as<br />

soon as the data has been sent to the printhead for printing, the<br />

data is removed from the buffer. Thus, for example, it is possible<br />

to miss printing a document if one of the printheads has a charge<br />

short, printing was stopped, and printing was resumed without<br />

performing a backspace.<br />

d. Enable or disable Position marking. If selected, when data is<br />

being printed outside the selected form, a mark is printed<br />

automatically at the edge of the print area.<br />

e. Code page is set to a default that should not be changed.<br />

f. Select an Orientation. The selection controls the orientation of<br />

the form, not of the pages within a form. The page orientation is<br />

selected as part of defining the form.<br />

g. Select End of job operations. Selecting Purge will cause a stop<br />

of printing between jobs, allowing changes of rolls or other transition<br />

work. Selecting Continue allows printing the next job iimmediately.<br />

h. Select, locate and give the dimensions and color of any cue mark<br />

to be printed on the front.<br />

i. Select, locate and give the dimensions and color of any cue mark<br />

to be printed on the back.<br />

j. If desired, select the 2D Bar code characteristic that allows for<br />

reduced size of each element in the bar code. A selection here<br />

does not reduce the size of the bar code itself. Selecting 0<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-11


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

provides no reduction, 1 reduces the bar code by one dot, 2 by<br />

two dots. Values greater than 2 are not recommended. Using<br />

reduction may correct dot gain in the printed document.<br />

5. If your printing system has printheads that use process color inks,<br />

select Spot, and define any composite colors with the following<br />

lettered steps. If your printing system has printheads that print black<br />

and one or more spot colors, you may need to modify this screen to<br />

duplicate the mapping set in step 3, with 100% intensity from a single<br />

system color.<br />

Print jobs that require OCA colors will typically require some<br />

adjustment through using this screen. Your work here will select each<br />

OCA color and then identify the intensities of each of its CMKY<br />

component colors. (Print jobs that use highlight colors and CMKY<br />

inks may require some adjustment through using the Highlight<br />

screen.) The selections here of intensity and any mixing of system<br />

colors for the resulting OCA color may affect the arrangement of data<br />

that is sent to each printhead. An intensity of less than 100% will<br />

cause dithering in the data for the printhead, and the printed result<br />

from two or more printheads will be the desired OCA color.<br />

• For example, any OCA colors of pure CMKY tones use 100%<br />

intensity of that system color of the same tone. Only the cyan<br />

printhead(s) receive(s) data identified as OCA cyan.<br />

• Using a more complex OCA color for another example, OCA<br />

mustard is composed of 0% cyan, 14% magenta, 23% black, and<br />

64% yellow. The printhead(s) printing magenta, black, and yellow<br />

are all provided dithered portions of the data identified as OCA<br />

mustard.<br />

a. If a file exists, select Open to select the file. The default<br />

configuration is exactly matched from OCA color to System color.<br />

The file names for these spot selections use .clr as an extension.<br />

If the file stdoca.clr is present in the .\clr directory, it contains the<br />

default settings.<br />

3-12 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

b. To define a new OCA color or to modify the contents of an<br />

opened file, select an OCA color.<br />

c. Identify the component colors by selecting one or more system<br />

colors and setting the intensity of each.<br />

d. Select Apply to save the color definition.<br />

e. Repeat step b through step d for each OCA color desired.<br />

f. Select Save to make a file of your changes to OCA color<br />

mapping.<br />

6. If your printing system prints spot colors that are either true spot<br />

colors or colors composed of two or more inks, select Highlight, and<br />

define these highlight colors with the following lettered steps.<br />

Print jobs that require highlight colors may require some adjustment<br />

through using this screen. Your work here will select each highlight<br />

color and then identify the intensities of each of its component system<br />

colors. (Print jobs that require spot colors through the use of CMKY<br />

inks may require some adjustment through using the Spot screen.)<br />

The selections here of intensity and any mixing of system colors for<br />

the resulting highlight may affect the arrangement of data that is sent<br />

to each printhead. An intensity of less than 100% will cause dithering<br />

in the data for the printhead, and the printed result from two or more<br />

printheads will be the desired highlight color.<br />

a. If a file exists, select Open to select the file. The default<br />

configuration is exactly matched from System color to highlight<br />

color.<br />

The file names for these highlight selections use .clr as an<br />

extension. If the file stdoca.clr is present in the .\clr directory, it<br />

contains the default settings.<br />

b. To define a new highlight color or to modify the contents of an<br />

opened file, select or name a highlight color.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-13


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

c. Identify the component colors by selecting one or more system<br />

colors and setting the intensity of each.<br />

d. Select Apply to save the color definition.<br />

e. Repeat step b through step d for each highlight color desired.<br />

f. Select Save to make a file of changes to highlight color mapping.<br />

7. If your process colors should use color correction, select Correct.<br />

Use the following information for the type of color data in your print<br />

job.<br />

Your print data has CYMK colors<br />

a. Use the Look-up tables section for selecting a LUT for each<br />

color.<br />

• Each color will use a different LUT.<br />

• The selections can range from Full (100%) to None (0%).<br />

b. Select Apply to save the look-up table definition.<br />

Your print data has RGB colors or CMYK colors for offset<br />

presses<br />

a. Select Enable ICC color correction.<br />

• If your data has RGB colors, select the Default RGB input.<br />

• If your data has CMYK colors formatted for offset presses, select<br />

a Default CMYK input.<br />

• Select the CMYK output.<br />

• If your data may have unsupported colors, select a<br />

Transformation method. (This is also known as Rendering intent.)<br />

The selection allows you to map any unsupported colors to a<br />

color that can be printed. Four options are available, and Relative<br />

Color Metric usually has the best results.<br />

b. Select Apply to save the ICC color correction definition.<br />

3-14 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

8. If your data includes an area to be compared from form to form,<br />

perform the following lettered steps:<br />

a. Use the PSI screens to make the printheads in the system ready<br />

to print.<br />

b. Select Job → Bit region to enable the data comparison function.<br />

c. Ask your computer operator to send data from the host computer.<br />

d. Wait for data to show in the buffer.<br />

9. If your data includes an area to be compared from form to form, select<br />

Bit region to identify the area. Use the following lettered steps.<br />

a. Use the first scroll bar to display a position and printhead color<br />

that has data to be checked. The names of these positions are<br />

identified by your selections on the Colors and Spot screens<br />

(shown here as “Front, Black” and “Front, Blue”).<br />

b. Select the position and printhead color.<br />

c. Select Checking, if desired.<br />

d. If you want the data to be cleared after it has been checked—and<br />

before it will be printed, select Clearing.<br />

Note: From this point on, you may use some of the steps, and not all, to<br />

define the location of data to be checked.<br />

e. If desired, you can enter the starting location of the data to be<br />

checked in the X and Y fields. The values appear in fields near<br />

the lower scroll area.<br />

f. If desired, you can enter the size of the data to be checked in the<br />

Width and Length fields. The values appear in fields near the<br />

lower scroll area, and the area is shown in the scroll area.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-15


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Identifying Printheads<br />

g. In the lower scroll area, enter a document number that contains<br />

the data to be checked. Alternatively, use the arrows to page<br />

through the document numbers.<br />

h. Select Fit to page or 1:1. The lower scroll area adjusts accordingly.<br />

i. Place the cursor at the top left corner of the data to be checked,<br />

and drag to the lower right corner. The values appear in fields in<br />

the upper scroll area and in fields near the lower scroll area.<br />

j. Select Apply to save the area information.<br />

k. Exit this setup activity by choosing another screen.<br />

10. If you are performing “Setting Up a Print Job” on page 2-35, return to<br />

step 6 on page 2-40.<br />

Setting the Web Tension<br />

Web tension is more critical at higher printing speeds. The tension should<br />

not be adjusted until after some printing has occurred. You should<br />

observe the effects of printing and drying on the web before changing the<br />

web tension. The following procedure fine-tunes the work of “Tightening<br />

the Web” on page 2-23.<br />

1. If the web is not moving already, select elect Run slow or Run fast.<br />

2. At the operator display, select Web.<br />

3. Select the web weight for the paper.<br />

4. Select Pull ratio. The following steps use the Pull ratio screen (Figure<br />

3.10).<br />

Figure 3.10<br />

Pull ratio screen<br />

Note: In the following steps, leave the setting for INFEED 1 unchanged at<br />

0.00%. Its pull ratio is a reference for all gripper rollers<br />

downstream.<br />

3-16 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Zeroing the Printhead Position<br />

5. Adjust the gripper rollers in downstream order, tightening the web<br />

with the following steps:<br />

a. Select the gripper roller.<br />

b. Observe the paper upstream from the gripper roller.<br />

• If the tension is too loose, use Up arrow to add 0.01 to 0.05%.<br />

Excessive paper drift is one sign of loose web tension. Excessive<br />

ink coverage may occur when printing with loose web tension.<br />

• If the tension is too tight, use Down arrow to subtract 0.01 to<br />

0.05%.<br />

Snapping sounds while printing is one sign of high web tension.<br />

Excessive web breaks and coning of the rewind roll also indicate<br />

high web tension.<br />

Note: If the change crosses the zero point (0.00), you must press<br />

Positive or Negative to continue making a change in the same<br />

direction.<br />

c. Select Enter.<br />

d. Wait a minute or more, and check the paper tension again.<br />

e. If necessary, repeat the pull ratio adjustments for the gripper<br />

roller.<br />

f. Repeat step 5 for each of the downstream gripper rollers.<br />

6. Use one of the following options:<br />

• Go to step a in “Overview” on page 2-1 to start printing a job<br />

• Go to “Selecting a New Printing Speed” on page 2-53<br />

• Resume printing a job.<br />

Zeroing the Printhead Position<br />

Zero the printhead(s) if the electronic record of a printhead location is<br />

different from the printhead’s actual location. In most cases, the printing<br />

system will display an error about lateral registration. However, zeroing<br />

may be done at any other time. Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the Operator display at print tower D, select Registration. The<br />

following screen appears:<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-17


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Aligning and Positioning the Web <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Figure 3.11<br />

Registration screen<br />

2. Select the printhead(s) with the zeroing error by pressing one or<br />

more printhead buttons.<br />

3. Select Error to display the Lateral positioning screen.<br />

Figure 3.12<br />

Printhead lateral error screen<br />

4. Select Start to move the printhead(s) to zero position.<br />

5. When the printhead(s) stop moving, and the Error screen displays<br />

again, select Return. to display the Registration screen.<br />

Aligning and Positioning the Web <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Refer to the manufacturer documents provided with the printing system<br />

for aligning the web guide.<br />

3-18 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Your printing system has one or more cue sensors (Figure 3.14, Figure<br />

3.15, and/or Figure 3.13), whose locations are described in “Positioning<br />

the Cue Sensor” on page 2-30. Your printing system has four page<br />

correlation sensors described in “Positioning the Page Correlation<br />

Sensors” on page 2-51.<br />

The procedure for aiming the sensors at cue marks are basic operations.<br />

Refer to “Positioning the Cue Sensor” on page 2-30 or “Setting Up Page<br />

Correlation” on page 2-48.<br />

Figure 3.13<br />

Keyence sensor and amplifier, detail<br />

Sensor under the web<br />

Sensor above the web<br />

Adjusting the Sensitivity<br />

A sensor is held in place above the moving web by a rail parallel to a<br />

roller. The sensor creates a beam of light that is reflected in different<br />

amounts when a cue mark or unprinted web is under the beam. Adjusting<br />

the sensitivity helps the sensor respond correctly for the different values<br />

of reflected light.<br />

Different brands of cue sensors are used, depending on when the system<br />

was built and what options were ordered. The brands have the following<br />

control markings:<br />

Brand name Omron Sick Keyence<br />

Mode selector<br />

TEACH<br />

RUN<br />

(not used)<br />

TEACH<br />

RUN<br />

ADJUST<br />

(none)<br />

Threshold indicator (none) Row of red LEDs Green LED numbers<br />

Mark indicator<br />

Method of<br />

determining cue<br />

(none)<br />

TEACH<br />

button<br />

Row of green<br />

arrow LEDs<br />

SET button<br />

Sensor status LED is off;<br />

High red LED numbers<br />

Crossing threshold<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-19


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Omron cue sensor<br />

Use the following steps to adjust the sensitivity.<br />

1. Move the sensor or the web to place a cue mark under the sensor.<br />

2. Select TEACH with the MODE SELECTOR.<br />

3. Press the TEACH button.<br />

4. Move the sensor or the web to place unprinted web under the sensor.<br />

5. Press the TEACH button.<br />

6. Select RUN with the MODE SELECTOR.<br />

7. Continue operation.<br />

Figure 3.14<br />

Omron cue sensor, detail<br />

Light source and sensor<br />

Mode selector<br />

Teach button<br />

Sick cue sensor<br />

Use the following steps to adjust the sensitivity.<br />

1. On the amplifier, unscrew the cover to reveal the controls.<br />

2. Move the sensor or the web to place a cue mark under the sensor.<br />

3. Select TEACH with the MODE SELECTOR.<br />

4. Press SET. The row of green arrow LEDs should light.<br />

5. Move the sensor or the web to place unprinted web under the sensor.<br />

6. Press SET.<br />

7. If the row of red rectangle LEDs light, repeat the procedure.<br />

8. Select RUN with the MODE SELECTOR.<br />

9. Close the cover and continue operation.<br />

3-20 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Figure 3.15<br />

Sick cue sensor, detail<br />

Mode selector<br />

Red LED row<br />

Green LED row<br />

Set button<br />

Light source and sensor<br />

Keyence cue sensor<br />

Use the following steps to adjust the sensitivity.<br />

1. On the amplifier (Figure 3.16), flip the cover to reveal the controls.<br />

2. Move the sensor or the web to place a mark under the sensor. The<br />

SENSOR STATUS LED should not light.<br />

3. Note the mark value shown by the RED LED NUMBER.<br />

4. Move the sensor or the web to place unprinted web under the sensor.<br />

The SENSOR STATUS LED should light.<br />

5. Note the non-mark value shown by the RED LED NUMBER.<br />

6. With the THRESHOLD SELECTOR ROCKER, change the value of the<br />

GREEN LED NUMBER to midway between the two readings.<br />

7. Test the setting by moving the mark under the sensor and away. The<br />

SENSOR STATUS LED should turn off and on.<br />

8. Close the cover and continue operation.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-21


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Figure 3.16<br />

Keyence sensor and amplifier, detail<br />

Mode selector<br />

Threshold selector rocker<br />

Red LED numbers<br />

Green LED numbers<br />

Set button<br />

Sensor status LED<br />

Setting the Cue Delays<br />

Usually this procedure occurs just after system installation or<br />

reconfiguring for a new print job. Adjustments of cue delays affect the<br />

location of printing along the direction of web movement. The cross-web<br />

location of printing is controlled by moving the printhead from the<br />

Operator display at print tower D.<br />

Required Tools<br />

• Marking pen<br />

• Tape measure, 50 ft (15 m) or longer.<br />

1. Web the full printing system for a configuration required by a print job.<br />

• The webbing configuration may be for a typical print job.<br />

• The configuration may be unique, or a new type of print job.<br />

2. Perform “Adjusting the Sensitivity” on page 3-19 for any cue sensors<br />

that have not been adjusted.<br />

3. Using a black marker, mark the web at each beam from the cue<br />

sensors. Name each location on the web, beside your mark. Your<br />

printing system may include the following sensors:<br />

• Print tower A (See “Cue sensor” on page 1-11.)<br />

• Print tower A, reverse side (See “Cue sensor” on page 1-12.)<br />

• Print tower B or C (See “Cue sensor” on page 1-17.)<br />

• Print tower D (See “Page correlation sensors” on page 1-19.)<br />

4. Move all printheads to approximately the cross-web location of the<br />

cue marks, using the following steps.<br />

a. At the Operator display at print tower D, select Registration.<br />

3-22 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

b. Select one Printhead or more by pressing the printhead<br />

button(s).<br />

c. Enter a value for the distance to move the printhead(s).<br />

d. If desired, select Inch or mm to change to the alternate unit of<br />

measurement.<br />

e. Select OS or GS. The printhead moves immediately.<br />

f. If necessary, repeat step 4 for each printhead.<br />

5. At each printhead, mark the web immediately beneath the print array.<br />

Name each location beside the mark on the web. The closer your<br />

mark is to the actual array location, the less correction you will need<br />

to provide later.<br />

6. If your system includes a rewind unit, tear the web before it enters<br />

that module.<br />

7. Jog the web so the mark for the most upstream cue sensor is clear of<br />

the printing system.<br />

8. Tear the web to remove the entire length of marked web, and lay the<br />

web face up on the floor.<br />

9. Measure the distances from the first cue sensor to each downstream<br />

cue sensor, and mark the distances on the web at each cue sensor.<br />

10. Measure the distances from each printhead to the nearest upstream<br />

cue sensor, and mark the cue distances on the web at each<br />

printhead.<br />

• If the print job(s) will not use a preprinted cue mark, the first set of<br />

printheads will use a virtual cue. It is likely that one of the<br />

printheads will print a cue mark with black ink for use<br />

downstream.<br />

• If a set of printheads does not have a cue sensor upstream, the<br />

printheads will use a virtual cue.<br />

• For the virtual cue, the first printhead’s cue distance is 1.00 inch<br />

(2.54 mm), and the cue distance for each printhead downstream<br />

uses the distance from the first printhead plus 1.00 inch.<br />

11. At the system controller software, enter the cue distances as the CUE<br />

DELAY and provide other values as described for the system controller<br />

in your printing system. (Go to “CS300” on page 3-26, or “CS400 and<br />

CS600” on page 3-24.)<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-23


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

CS400 and CS600<br />

a. From any screen, select Transport.<br />

b. Select Model, if necessary, to add modules such as print towers,<br />

printheads, cue sensors, and turnbars that depict your configuration.<br />

c. Select Job and Printers, if necessary, to drag and drop printheads<br />

to RIPs.<br />

d. Save your entries for the RIP assignments by selecting Apply.<br />

e. Select Print, then select each Printhead, and enter the following<br />

information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Used by<br />

printer<br />

As marked<br />

Selected in the Job → Printers screen.<br />

Cue sensor A, B, C, or D Identity of the cue sensor upstream of this<br />

printhead. (A is most upstream.)<br />

Cue delay<br />

Speed<br />

compensation<br />

As measured<br />

on the web<br />

0.010 or as<br />

measured<br />

Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

See “Calculating the Speed Comp Value”<br />

on page 3-27.<br />

Registration 0.0 This will be changed later.<br />

S120/1RIP 1<br />

Identifies the data source and RIP for the<br />

printhead, configured with Job →<br />

Printers.<br />

Mount<br />

Position 0.00 or 8.97 0.00: near the GS.<br />

8.97: near the OS.<br />

Color As filled<br />

Page correlation<br />

Mark Position 0.0 to 8.96 The location for the left edge of the page<br />

correlation mark. See “Placing the Page<br />

Correlation Marks” on page 3-29.<br />

Mark Width 0.063 to 8.96 The width of the page correlation mark.<br />

See “Placing the Page Correlation Marks”<br />

on page 3-29.<br />

Sensor Not used, 1,<br />

2, 3, or 4<br />

The sensor that will detect marks for this<br />

printhead.<br />

3-24 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

f. Save your entries for each printhead by selecting Apply.<br />

g. Repeat step e and step f for each printhead.<br />

h. Select each Cue sensor, and enter the following information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Used by<br />

printhead<br />

Compensation<br />

Cue interval<br />

As measured Distance from the leading edge of one<br />

cue mark to the next.<br />

Cue tolerance 0.01 to 0.25 A larger tolerance allows shifting of the<br />

printed material to cue marks.<br />

Max. missed<br />

cues<br />

0 or 3 to 6 0: missing cue marks cause generated<br />

cue marks.<br />

3 to 6: consecutive missing cues over the<br />

number cause an error.<br />

Override As needed Applies only to the first sensor.<br />

Generate As needed<br />

Generate<br />

count<br />

Generate<br />

internal<br />

Dark cue mark<br />

OR<br />

Light cue mark<br />

As needed<br />

As needed<br />

If more than one document is printed for<br />

each due, provide the number of<br />

additional documents per cue.<br />

If more than one document is printed for<br />

each due, provide the length of each<br />

document.<br />

Describe the cue mark.<br />

Startup delay<br />

documents 0 Applies only to the second and later<br />

sensors.<br />

distance As measured Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

i. Save your entries for each cue sensor by selecting Apply.<br />

j. Repeat step h and step i for each cue sensor.<br />

k. Go to step 12 on page 3-27.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-25


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

CS300<br />

a. From any screen, select Transport.<br />

b. Select Model, if necessary, to add modules such as print towers,<br />

printheads, cue sensors, and turnbars that depict this configuration.<br />

c. Select each Printhead, and enter the following information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Enable<br />

Selected<br />

Type 9300<br />

Color As filled<br />

Cue A, B, C, or D Identity of the cue sensor upstream of this<br />

printhead. (A is most upstream.)<br />

Mount front or back Front: prints on the front side of the web.<br />

Back: prints on the reverse.<br />

Position 0.00 or 8.97 0.00: near the GS.<br />

8.97: near the OS.<br />

Cue delay As measured<br />

on the web<br />

Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

Speed<br />

compensation<br />

0.010 or as<br />

measured<br />

See “Calculating the Speed Comp Value”<br />

on page 3-27.<br />

Registration 0.0 This will be changed later.<br />

d. Save your entries for each printhead by selecting Apply.<br />

e. Repeat step c and step d for each printhead.<br />

f. Select each Cue sensor, and enter the following information:<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Cue interval<br />

or<br />

As measured Distance from the leading edge of one<br />

cue mark to the next.<br />

3-26 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Field Value Detail<br />

Same as form Selected<br />

Cue tolerance 0.01 to 0.25<br />

Max. missed<br />

cues<br />

Startup delay:<br />

documents<br />

Startup delay:<br />

distance<br />

Requires definition of form size on<br />

Job→Forms screen.<br />

A larger tolerance allows shifting of the<br />

printed material to cue marks.<br />

0 or 3 to 6 0: missing cue marks cause generated<br />

cue marks.<br />

3 to 6: consecutive missing cues over the<br />

number cause an error.<br />

0<br />

As measured Distance from the nearest upstream cue<br />

sensor to the print array. See step 10 on<br />

page 3-23 for printing a cue mark for use<br />

by downstream cue sensors.<br />

g. Save your entries for each cue sensor by selecting Apply.<br />

h. Repeat step f and step g for each cue sensor.<br />

i. Select Print.<br />

j. Go to step 12 on page 3-27.<br />

12. Go to “Adjusting the Data Registration” on page 2-43.<br />

13. Go to “Adjusting the Printhead Registration” on page 2-45.<br />

Calculating the Speed Comp Value<br />

Speed compensation corrects the print registration for different<br />

characteristics of low-speed and high-speed printing. Providing this value<br />

may be optional. The value is needed more for jobs that may be run at<br />

both high speeds and low speeds or at very high speeds.<br />

The procedure prints test pages at a slow speed and then at a high<br />

speed. At a high speed, the ink drops will shift upstream without speed<br />

compensation, and this shift is noticed in comparison to any preprinted<br />

cue marks, text, or graphics. Use the following steps to calculate the best<br />

speed comp value for each printhead.<br />

Required Tools<br />

• Web preprinted with cue marks or image with a clear leading edge<br />

• Measuring loupe, 7X minimum, scale intervals 0.005 or smaller.<br />

1. If possible, use web that is preprinted with cue marks or other preprint<br />

for each document.<br />

• The downstream edge of the cue mark or preprint will be used as<br />

a common measurement point.<br />

• If the web is not preprinted, the downstream edge of the image or<br />

text printed by the first printhead (the most upstream printhead) is<br />

used as the common measurement point.<br />

2. At the controller, set the Speed compensation to 0.000 for each<br />

printhead, using one of the following bulleted items.<br />

Note: If the web is not preprinted, set the first printhead’s speed<br />

compensation to 0.100 inch (0.254 cm).<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-27


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

CS600 & CS400 • Select Print, then select each Printhead, and enter the value in<br />

the screen.<br />

Speed compensation<br />

CS300 • Select Transport, then select each Printhead, and enter the<br />

value in the screen.<br />

Speed compensation<br />

3. Print test patterns at a slow speed: 25 feet per minute (7 meters per<br />

minute) or no more than 50 fpm (15 mpm). (See “Printing Test Pages”<br />

on page 2-41.)<br />

4. Stop printing, cut out a print sample, and resplice the web.<br />

5. Increase the printing speed to the maximum and take another print<br />

sample. If possible, use 500 fpm (152 mpm).<br />

6. On the slow speed sample, as accurately as possible, measure the<br />

distance from the leading edge of the cue mark to the leading edge of<br />

print from each printhead.<br />

7. On the fast speed sample, measure the distance from the leading<br />

edge of the cue mark to the leading edge of print from each printhead.<br />

8. For each printhead, find the difference between the two samples’<br />

measurements for each printhead. Typically the difference will be<br />

near 0.10 inch (0.254 cm).<br />

3-28 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Figure 3.17<br />

Measuring the print differences for speed compensation<br />

25 fpm, 7 mpm 500 fpm, 152 mpm<br />

0.684<br />

0.577 0.608<br />

0.50 in, 1.270 cm 0.672 in, 1.706 cm<br />

Suscipit lorem<br />

ipsum dolor sit<br />

amet, con<br />

sectetuer<br />

adipiscing elit,<br />

sed diam<br />

nonnumy nibh<br />

Suscipit lorem<br />

ipsum dolor sit<br />

amet, con<br />

sectetuer<br />

adipiscing elit,<br />

sed diam<br />

nonnumy nibh<br />

9. Calculate the speed compensation Value for each printhead:<br />

• Using English units, use the following formula.<br />

Value = Difference in inches x 500 ÷ maximum speed<br />

• Using metric units, use the following formula.<br />

Value = Difference in cm x 152 ÷ maximum speed<br />

10. Enter the Value in each printhead’s definition, as in step 2. The range<br />

is 0.000 to 0.500 inches (0.000 to 1.27 cm).<br />

11. Check the registration at the low and maximum speeds again to make<br />

sure that the calculated value is appropriate. The differences should<br />

be less than 0.003 inch (0.007 cm), which is finer than the<br />

specification for holding register in the transport system.<br />

Placing the Page Correlation Marks<br />

Page correlation allows printing and reading of a block of encoded marks<br />

that is printed on each page. These encoded marks are added to the data<br />

while it is being ripped, and their use is not equivalent to data checking.<br />

The block of marks identifies a location on the web that should receive<br />

print data from one printhead that relates to print data from another<br />

printhead for the opposite side of the paper or for a page printed side-byside<br />

on the web. Up to four locations can be correlated, indicating four<br />

printed faces that are destined for the same printed product. These faces<br />

are the front left, front right, back right and back left sides in a two-up<br />

duplex print job.<br />

The block of encoded marks has six areas reserved for a printed mark or<br />

a white space, representing a number from 0 to 31. An operator can<br />

identify the position and size of the block with entries at the system<br />

controller, as described in “Setting Up Page Correlation” on page 2-48.<br />

Figure 3.18 shows the resulting marks printed for the 26th page or<br />

document, using the operator entries given.<br />

When “Generate numbers” is selected, a two-part number is printed after<br />

the correlation mark. The first part is the copy number, and the second<br />

part is the full document number. The two numbers are separated by a<br />

colon.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-29


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

Figure 3.18<br />

Page correlation marks<br />

Required 3.0 inches unprinted space before mark<br />

Position 0.25; Mark position 0.25<br />

Cue mark<br />

1:445242<br />

Height 0.25<br />

Position 0.25; Mark position 8.46<br />

Mark width 0.25<br />

Numbers produced with “generate numbers”<br />

1:445242<br />

Direction of web<br />

Placing the page correlation marks in a different area from the cue mark<br />

will avoid confusing the two marks. The cue mark can occur at the same<br />

point across the page, but it should be separated by twice the width of the<br />

sensor beam. The cue mark can be at the same point along the web, but<br />

it must be either more than 3.0 inches (7.62 cm) before the correlation<br />

mark or more than the distance set with Print → Cue sensor → Cue<br />

tolerance at the controller.<br />

Using Special Cueing<br />

Some installations need to print documents that are to be synchronized to<br />

a sheeter-stacker unit, folding unit, or other finishing equipment. Using<br />

special cueing can identify the cue sensor that provides the primary cue<br />

signal to this other equipment. Typically, any other cue sensors operate in<br />

a normal mode.<br />

The information in this section refers to sheeting requirements, but it can<br />

also be used for folding, stacking, eject gates, and many other finishing<br />

operations.<br />

Two Alternatives to Special Cueing<br />

Other means of achieving the same effect include the following alterations<br />

to the printing system or job data:<br />

• Position the cue sensor that actuates the sheeting at a greater<br />

distance upstream from the sheeter. This allows the cue signal to be<br />

registered before printed documents arrive at the sheeter, and may<br />

allow some period for the blade to be servoed to the correct sheeting<br />

location.<br />

3-30 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

For calculating the optimum location, multiply one half the sheet<br />

length times the number of revolutions to servo the sheeter cylinder<br />

one inch toward a new sheet mark. Then position the cue sensor that<br />

number of documents’ distance upstream.<br />

• Arrange for additional documents to be printed before the first<br />

document that must be well sheeted.<br />

For calculating the optimum number of additional documents, multiply<br />

one half the sheet length times the number of revolutions to servo the<br />

sheeter cylinder one inch toward a new sheet mark. Then begin<br />

printing with that number of documents’ data before the first nonscrap<br />

document.<br />

Implementing Special Cueing<br />

The following procedure is a manipulation of parameters in the controller<br />

software to achieve a result that was not originally intended.<br />

When using special cueing, some configurations use the first cue sensor<br />

in the printing system. The signal for that cue sensor is provided to the<br />

sheeting controls. Assuming that the first cue sensor is a long distance<br />

from the sheeter allows the sheeting action to adjust well before the first<br />

printed document reaches the sheeter. However, the calculations need<br />

occasional adjustment for paper stretching and shrinking due to humidity<br />

and temperature changes. In addition, any compensator adjustments in a<br />

slit-merge module may alter the true distance between the cue sensor<br />

and sheeter.<br />

CS600 & CS400<br />

CS600 & CS400<br />

The CS400 and CS600 controllers can allow manipulations of how a cue<br />

sensor is described that may provide special cueing with some accuracy.<br />

Use the following steps:<br />

1. At the controller, select Tools, and then select Tach/Cue.<br />

2. In the Cue setup box, select Separate cue intervals for each sensor.<br />

3. Select APPLY.<br />

4. Select PRINT, and select the Cue A icon.<br />

5. If necessary, deselect Override.<br />

6. Set the Cue tolerance to 0.01 inches.<br />

7. Select APPLY.<br />

8. Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all other active cue sensors.Set the<br />

Cue tolerance to the desired value (typically 0.1 inches).<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 3-31


Chapter 3. Advanced Operations<br />

Adjusting the Cue Sensor<br />

CS300<br />

CS300<br />

CS300 controllers can allow manipulations of how a cue sensor is<br />

described that may provide special cueing with some accuracy, but it is<br />

implemented through other controls.<br />

Use the following steps:<br />

1. At the controller, select TRANSPORT. You may need to select Setup.<br />

2. For each cue sensor, deselect Same as form.<br />

3. Select APPLY.<br />

4. Select PRINT, and select the Cue A icon.<br />

5. If necessary, deselect Override.<br />

6. Set the Cue tolerance to 0.01 inches.<br />

7. Select APPLY.<br />

8. Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all other active cue sensors.Set the<br />

Cue tolerance to the desired value (typically 0.1 inches).<br />

3-32 VX5000/50003 Printing Systems


Chapter 4.<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

The errors and warnings discussed in this chapter are only those<br />

displayed at the operator displays on the transport. Refer to controller<br />

online help for discussions of print station and controller errors.<br />

For web movement to occur for Run slow or Run fast speeds, the<br />

following seven conditions must be met:<br />

• All doors must be closed.<br />

• For printing at speeds higher than 75 fpm (28 mpm), the covers on<br />

the print towers must be closed.<br />

• The printing system must be webbed correctly. See “Webbing the<br />

Printing System” on page 2-4.<br />

• The web break sensors must be aligned to sense the web is in place.<br />

See “Positioning the Web Break Sensor” on page 2-32.<br />

• The OPERATOR KEY(S) must be switched off. See “Operator key” on<br />

page 1-18.<br />

• All gripper rollers must be engaged.<br />

• No indicators may be flashing red. Note that one indicator is placed<br />

behind the OS doors of print tower A. See “Print Tower A Controls” on<br />

page 1-11.<br />

• The correct finishing option must be selected at the Main screen,<br />

Operator display at print tower A. See “APR” on page 1-20.<br />

• If the rewind unit is the selected finishing option, the rewind control<br />

selections must include GRIPPER OFF and REWINDER TENSION ON. See<br />

“Rewind Unit Controls” on page 1-35.<br />

Controller Messages<br />

When errors occur in the print station, controller or print job, full<br />

information is available at the controller. To find the corrective actions<br />

needed for each warning or error, access the online help for each<br />

message when it displays.<br />

Error and status information is available in detail when you select<br />

Application, then select Messages. The messages screen (Figure 4.1)<br />

displays a log of all messages that have occurred since the log has been<br />

cleared.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-1


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Controller Messages<br />

Figure 4.1<br />

Application → Messages screen<br />

The log includes many status messages that document the normal<br />

functions of starting the printing system, changing configurations, loading<br />

print jobs, and shutting the printing system down. Mixed in with these<br />

normal messages, you may find error and warning messages.<br />

• A green checkmark identifies a normal message.<br />

• A yellow exclamation point identifies a warning message.<br />

• A red x identifies an error message.<br />

General status of each component is available when you select Print.<br />

The print screen (Figure 4.2) indicates a status of each module with a<br />

green, yellow, or red bar at the base of each icon.<br />

Figure 4.2<br />

Print screen<br />

• The green checkmark shown here indicates that messages are<br />

available for display. Select the component that shows a green<br />

checkmark, yellow exclamation point, or red x for more detailed<br />

information.<br />

4-2 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Controller Messages<br />

• When a warning or normal message is activated, its text is displayed<br />

for a short time at the bottom of the screen.<br />

• When an error is active, its text is displayed at the bottom of the<br />

screen until the condition is fixed and the message is cleared.<br />

• When a component is not used, it has no status bar, as shown for cue<br />

sensor B.<br />

The general status of each component is available when you select<br />

Tools, and then select Connections. The tools connection screen<br />

(Figure 4.3) reports the status of cabling connections and network<br />

identities. Its information is most useful to service persons.<br />

Figure 4.3<br />

Tools → connections screen<br />

The detailed print station and printhead status is available when you use<br />

the following steps to display detailed information for a specific printhead.<br />

1. From the subsystem bar, select PSI.<br />

2. From the work area, select the appropriate Printhead.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-3


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

3. From the work area, select More Detail.<br />

CS400<br />

You can also view the general status of system components while<br />

shutting the printing system down. (Select Application, then select<br />

Shutdown.<br />

• This status is most useful to monitor the proper closing down of each<br />

unit before shutting down the controller.<br />

• The status of each module is indicated by a green, yellow, or red bar<br />

at the base of each icon.<br />

• Select the module to display a list of the currently active messages for<br />

the module.<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

When errors occur in the unwind unit, print towers, still picture unit, or<br />

rewind unit, the printing system does not allow some operations. The<br />

controller indicates the unit that has detected a problem on the application<br />

→ messages screen and the print screen. More information is available at<br />

the operator display at print tower D. The operator display helps identify<br />

what caused the error.<br />

When correcting the problem, refer to “Recovering From an Emergency<br />

Stop” on page 2-52 as needed to completely prepare the printing system<br />

for printing.<br />

4-4 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

Error Screen<br />

The Error screen displays when any error occurs. Press the red button to<br />

find more information about an error.<br />

Figure 4.4<br />

Error screen<br />

After correcting the source of an error indication, press Main to clear the<br />

error indicated.<br />

PRINT ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The system controller reported an error at a print station or printhead.<br />

Use messages displayed by PSI for correcting the problem.<br />

WEB BREAK<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A web break occurred.<br />

Reweb and splice the web at the break.<br />

• If another button is active, it indicates the location of the web break.<br />

• If no other button is active, the web break occurred in a print tower.<br />

DIAMETER MAXIMUM<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The roll is full at the rewind unit.<br />

Replace it with an empty core.<br />

PAPER END<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The roll is empty at the unwind unit.<br />

Replace it with a full roll.<br />

APU ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

An error occurred at the unwind unit.<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “APU Error Screen”<br />

on page 4-7.<br />

APU COVER OPEN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A door is open at the unwind unit.<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “APU Cover Screen”<br />

on page 4-8.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-5


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

MOTOR [NUMBER] ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

GRIPPER ROLL ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

An error occurred at a motor.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

An error occurred at a gripper roller.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

APR ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

An error occurred at the rewind unit.<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “APR Error Screen”<br />

on page 4-16.<br />

IJP COVER OPEN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A door is open at a print tower or spacer unit.<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “IJP Cover Screen”<br />

on page 4-10.<br />

DRYER ERROR<br />

Explanation: An error occurred at the dryer in print tower D.<br />

Action:<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “Dryer Error Screen”<br />

on page 4-11.<br />

APR COVER OPEN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A door is open at the rewind unit.<br />

Press this button for additional information, and see “APR Cover Screen”<br />

on page 4-15.<br />

ERROR<br />

SEND MAIL<br />

Explanation: Displays an error detail screen, depending on the error.<br />

Action: See “APU Cover Screen” on page 1-31, “APR Error Screen” on page 4-<br />

16, “IJP Cover Screen” on page 1-30, “Dryer Error Screen” on page 4-11,<br />

or “APR Cover Screen” on page 1-32.<br />

Explanation:<br />

Sends an e-mail message to notify service dispatching that the error<br />

occurred, if the function is implemented at your facility.<br />

Note: Only authorized service persons or key operators should use this control.<br />

4-6 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

APU Error Screen<br />

The APU error screen displays when an error occurs in the unwind unit,<br />

the upstream spacer unit, or the processing unit. (The processing unit<br />

information displays even if the module is not installed.)<br />

Figure 4.5<br />

APU error screen<br />

ARM UP-DOWN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The position of the lift arm is unusual for current settings.<br />

Move the lift arm to engage the unwind gears. If the lift arm operation<br />

appears to be correct, contact your service person.<br />

INTERLOCK ON<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The lock-down bearing on the unwind shaft fails to release.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

INTERLOCK OFF<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The lock-down bearing on the unwind shaft fails to close.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

COMPRESSOR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The compressor has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

JOG OVER SPEED<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

PUNCH REGURATION<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

PUNCH BLOWER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The jog speed has exceeded the governor setting.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

The servo control of the punch regulator has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

The servo control of the punch blower has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

PUNCH SCREW<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The screw control of the punch machinery has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-7


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

COMPEN MOTOR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The compensator motor of the perf machinery has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

GRIPPER ROLL<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The gripper roller in the first spacer unit is not engaged.<br />

Turn on the gripper roller. If engaging the gripper roller does not clear the<br />

error, contact your service person.<br />

APU Cover Screen<br />

The APU cover screen displays when any error occurs in the unwind unit,<br />

the upstream spacer unit, or the processing unit.<br />

Figure 4.6<br />

APU cover screen<br />

APU<br />

The following covers are on the unwind unit.<br />

UPPER COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The glass cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

GS1 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

GS2 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

SLIDE COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The sliding door at the downstream end is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

4-8 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

ARM GS COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

ARM OS COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS access panel is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

The OS access panel is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

Processing No. 1<br />

The following covers are on the first processing unit.<br />

(The processing unit information displays even if the module is not installed.)<br />

UPPER COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The glass cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

GS1 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

SLIDE COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The sliding door at the downstream end is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

PUNCH COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The cover over the punch unit is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

Processing No. 2<br />

The following covers are on the second processing unit.<br />

(The processing unit information displays even if the module is not installed.)<br />

UPPER COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The glass cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

GS1 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-9


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

SLIDE COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The sliding door at the downstream end is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

COMPEN COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The cover over the compensator unit is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

IJP Cover Screen<br />

The IJP cover screen displays when any error occurs in the print towers<br />

or dryer.<br />

Figure 4.7<br />

IJP cover screen<br />

A UNIT STEP COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A UNIT OS1 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A UNIT OS2 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The door to the spacer unit is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

The OS door to print tower A is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

The OS door to print tower A is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

C UNIT COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The OS door to print tower C is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

D UNIT STEP COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The spacer unit downstream from print tower D is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

4-10 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

D UNIT SLIDE COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

D UNIT DRYER COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The sliding door of print tower D is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

The cover to the dryer is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

Dryer Error Screen<br />

The dryer error screen displays when any error occurs in the dryer.<br />

Figure 4.8<br />

Dryer error screen<br />

COVER OPEN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The dryer cover is open during dryer operation.<br />

Close the dryer cover.<br />

DRUM OVERHEAT<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The drum temperature is too high.<br />

Correct the dryer temperature. If the error appears again, contact your<br />

service person.<br />

AIR OVERHEAT<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

An intake air temperature is too high.<br />

Correct the air setting or air temperature setting. Check the air intake<br />

vents for obstructions. If the error appears again, contact your service<br />

person.<br />

AIR PRESS. DOWN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

AIR [NUMBER] HEATER BREAK<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Dryer air flow is failing.<br />

Check the air intake vents for obstructions. If the error appears again,<br />

contact your service person.<br />

The air heater has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-11


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

DRUM [NUMBER] HEATER BREAK<br />

Explanation: The dryer heater has failed.<br />

Action:<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

BLOWER ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A blower is not functioning properly.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

RESET<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Clears an error.<br />

If the cause of the error has been corrected, continue operations.<br />

Otherwise, contact your service person.<br />

NEGLECT BREAK<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Ignores a web break error and allows use by service persons while<br />

checking and correcting the problem.<br />

Operators should not use this control.<br />

MAIN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Displays the dryer screen.<br />

None.<br />

Printhead Lateral Errors<br />

One of the seven printhead lateral errors will display when a zeroing error<br />

occurs in a printhead. One or more highlighted printhead numbers<br />

indicate where the error occurred.<br />

Figure 4.9<br />

Printhead lateral motor error indicator<br />

LATERAL MOTOR ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The motor that moves a printhead in the OS-GS direction has an error.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.10<br />

Printhead lateral positioning error indicator<br />

4-12 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

WARNING: LATERAL ZERO POSITIONING NOT POSSIBLE DURING MACHINE RUNNING<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Zeroing a printhead was attempted while printing. Zeroing can only occur<br />

while the printing system is stopped.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.11<br />

Printhead OS limit error indicator<br />

WARNING: OS LIMIT ERROR DO LATERAL ZERO POSITIONING<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A printhead has been moved beyond the OS position.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.12<br />

Printhead OS over limit error indicator<br />

WARNING: OS OVER LIMIT<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A printhead has been moved beyond the OS position.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.13<br />

Printhead OS limit error indicator<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-13


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

WARNING: OS LIMIT ERROR DO LATEL ZERO POSITIONING<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A printhead has been moved beyond the OS position.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.14<br />

Printhead GS over limit error indicator<br />

WARNING: GS OVER LIMIT<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

A printhead has been moved beyond the OS position.<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Figure 4.15<br />

Printhead GS limit error indicator<br />

WARNING: GS LIMIT ERROR DO LATERAL ZERO POSITIONING<br />

Explanation: A printhead has been moved beyond the OS position.<br />

Action:<br />

Select OK to display the printhead lateral error screen and correct the<br />

problem.<br />

Printhead Lateral Error Screen<br />

The printhead lateral error screen displays when any error occurs in the<br />

positioning mechanism for a printhead.<br />

Figure 4.16<br />

Printhead lateral error screen<br />

4-14 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

[PRINTHEAD NUMBER]<br />

MOTOR ERROR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

LATERAL ZERO POSITIONING<br />

START<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

LATERAL ZERO POSITIONING<br />

STOP<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The motor for the identified printhead needs to be zeroed.<br />

Zero the printhead position. See “Zeroing the Printhead Position” on page<br />

3-17.<br />

Starts the zeroing for the selected printheads.<br />

Wait until printhead movement stops, then select Main, APU, WEB, DRYER,<br />

or REGISTRATION.<br />

Stops the zeroing for the selected printheads.<br />

Select printheads and press Start again.<br />

RESET<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

This button displays the printhead registration screen.<br />

None.<br />

SEND MAIL<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Not implemented.<br />

None.<br />

RETURN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

Moves the selected printheads to their original positions.<br />

None.<br />

APR Cover Screen<br />

The APR cover screen displays when a cover is opened in the rewind<br />

unit.<br />

Figure 4.17<br />

APR cover screen<br />

UPPER COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The glass cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-15


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

GS1 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

GS2 COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

SLIDE COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The upstream sliding door is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

ARM GS COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

ARM OS COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The GS access panel cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

The OS access panel cover is open.<br />

Close the cover, press OK, and select Main, APU, Web, Dryer, or<br />

Registration.<br />

APR Error Screen<br />

The APR error screen displays when an error occurs in the unwind unit,<br />

any gripper roller, or the rewind unit.<br />

Figure 4.18<br />

APR error screen<br />

ARM UP-DOWN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The position of the lift arm is unusual for current settings.<br />

Move the lift arm to engage the unwind gears. If the lift arm operation<br />

appears to be correct, contact your service person.<br />

INTERLOCK ON<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The lock-down bearing on the unwind shaft fails to release.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

4-16 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

INTERLOCK OFF<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

SLITTER MOTOR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

REWINDER INVERTOR<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

REWINDER INVERTOR FAN<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The lock-down bearing on the unwind shaft fails to close.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

The motor for the optional slitter has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

Exceeding the limits for paper movement has cause a failure in the<br />

inverter.<br />

Lower the tension, or use a lighter paper, and contact your service person<br />

to reset the inverter.<br />

The fan in the inverter has failed.<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

TENSION OFF<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

No tension is applied to the rewind unit.<br />

Turn on the tension control. If the error is not cleared, contact your service<br />

person.<br />

Miscellaneous Errors<br />

Some errors are indicated by display of a special notice.<br />

OVERHEATUNG IS UNUSUAL THE BREAKER OF A HEATER IS TURNED OFF<br />

Explanation: A circuit breaker has tripped for the dryer.<br />

Action:<br />

Contact your service person.<br />

PLC BATTERY LOW<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

SERVO BATTERY LOW<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The battery backup for RAM on the PLC computer is low.<br />

Press ok, notify a service person, and continue your print job.<br />

The battery backup for RAM on the servo computer is low.<br />

Press ok, notify a service person, and continue your print job.<br />

PROCESS UNIT OIL PUMP ERROR<br />

Explanation: Oil is low in the processing unit.<br />

Action:<br />

Perform “Supply Grease to the Processing Unit”.<br />

WARNING: UPPER COVER CLOSED<br />

Explanation: The cover to the print tower is closed, and printhead movement is not<br />

allowed.<br />

Action:<br />

Open the cover, and select the printhead movement again.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 4-17


Chapter 4. Troubleshooting<br />

Printing Machinery Messages<br />

WARNING: HIT TO COVER<br />

Explanation:<br />

Action:<br />

The printhead struck the cover to the print tower.<br />

Open the cover, and select the printhead movement again.<br />

WARNING: REMOVE CATCHPAN OR SERVICE TOOL<br />

Explanation: The catchpan or service tool was installed when you requested printhead<br />

movement.<br />

Action:<br />

Remove the catchpan or service tool, and select the printhead movement<br />

again.<br />

4-18 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 5.<br />

Maintenance<br />

Operators must perform the regular maintenance shown in Table 5.1.<br />

Table 5.1<br />

Operator maintenance<br />

Procedure<br />

“Perform Print Station Maintenance” on page 5-2<br />

“Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit” on page 5-2<br />

“Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit Shaft Grip Adjust”<br />

on page 5-4<br />

“Supply Grease to the Printhead Worm Gear” on page<br />

5-5<br />

“Check the Web Cleaner Filters” on page 5-6<br />

“Clean the Web Cleaner Internal Components” on page<br />

5-6<br />

“Check the HEPA Filter for Dust” on page 5-7<br />

“Supply Grease to the Rewind Unit” on page 5-8<br />

“Perform Print Station Maintenance” on page 5-10<br />

“Replace the HEPA Pre-filters” on page 5-10<br />

“Replace the Web Cleaner Pre-filters” on page 5-10<br />

Frequency<br />

Weekly or as required<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Monthly<br />

Quarterly<br />

Quarterly or as<br />

required<br />

Quarterly or as<br />

required<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-1


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Daily Procedures<br />

Daily Procedures<br />

Perform the following maintenance daily, usually at the end of each shift.<br />

There are no daily procedures for the unwind unit or print towers or<br />

rewind unit.<br />

Weekly Procedures<br />

Perform the following maintenance weekly.<br />

There are no weekly procedures for the unwind unit or the rewind unit.<br />

Print Towers<br />

Perform Print Station Maintenance<br />

Refer to the Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> for the DT9000 series print stations for<br />

maintaining components at the printhead interface and vacuum cabinet.<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Perform the following maintenance monthly.<br />

Note: All the procedures except for “Print Tower Units” on page 5-5 must be<br />

performed with power off for the full printing system. As desired, all<br />

procedures may be performed at the same time, and the final step of<br />

each procedure, turning on the printing system, can be ignored until all<br />

procedures are complete.<br />

Unwind Unit<br />

Perform the following monthly procedures.<br />

Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the unwind unit, bring the lift arms down, to move any roll away<br />

from the work area. (Use the first steps of “Loading and Unloading<br />

Paper at the Unwind Unit” on page 2-4.)<br />

2. Turn off the printing system, using the full procedure “Turning the<br />

Printing System Off” on page 2-53.<br />

5-2 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Figure 5.1<br />

Grease locations, unwind unit, lift arms<br />

GS interior wall<br />

OS interior wall<br />

5<br />

7<br />

6<br />

8<br />

4<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

3. Repeat the following lettered steps for a total of eight times at the<br />

following locations:<br />

• OS lift arm and OS interior wall: (1) Interlock bearing, (2) End<br />

stop bearing, (3) Lower support bearing, (4) Control end pivot<br />

• GS lift arm and GS interior wall: (5) End stop bearing, (6)<br />

Interlock bearing, (7) Lower support bearing, (8) Control end<br />

pivot.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

5<br />

4<br />

6<br />

3<br />

7 8<br />

a. Attach the grease gun connector to a grease fitting shown in<br />

Figure 5.1.<br />

Note: The grease gun is supplied as an operator tool. The connector may<br />

be detached from the grease gun for easy storage in the supplied<br />

tool box.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-3


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

b. Pump the grease gun handle two or three times. Stop pumping if<br />

grease squeezes out at the fitting.<br />

c. Wipe any remaining grease off the fitting and adjacent surfaces.<br />

4. Turn on the printing system to raise the lift arms, or continue with the<br />

next monthly procedure.<br />

Supply Grease to the Unwind Unit Shaft Grip Adjust<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. Turn off the printing system, using the full procedure “Turning the<br />

Printing System Off” on page 2-53.<br />

2. Attach the grease gun connector to a grease fitting shown in Figure<br />

5.2.<br />

Note: The grease gun is supplied as an operator tool. The connector may<br />

be detached from the grease gun for easy storage in the supplied<br />

tool box.<br />

3. Pump the grease gun handle two or three times. Stop pumping if<br />

grease squeezes out at the fitting.<br />

4. Wipe any remaining grease off the fitting and adjacent surfaces.<br />

5. Continue with the next monthly procedure.<br />

Figure 5.2<br />

Grease locations, unwind unit, OS interior<br />

Grease fitting<br />

5-4 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Print Tower Units<br />

Perform the following monthly procedures.<br />

Supply Grease to the Printhead Worm Gear<br />

At each printhead, use the following procedure:<br />

1. Stop printing or web movement.<br />

2. At each print tower, press Press COVER UP. An alarm sounds while<br />

the cover is moving.<br />

3. Move the printheads to service position. (See “Moving a Printhead to<br />

Service Position” on page 2-24.)<br />

4. At the back of the printhead carriage, attach the grease gun<br />

connector to a grease fitting shown in Figure 5.3.<br />

Note: The grease gun is supplied as an operator tool. The connector may<br />

be detached from the grease gun for easy storage in the supplied<br />

tool box.<br />

5. Pump the grease gun handle two or three times. Stop pumping if<br />

grease squeezes out at the fitting.<br />

6. Wipe any remaining grease off the fitting and adjacent surfaces.<br />

7. Return the printhead to print position. (See “Moving a Printhead to<br />

Printing Position” on page 2-25.)<br />

8. Press COVER UP to lower the cover. An alarm sounds while the cover<br />

is moving.<br />

9. Repeat this procedure for each printhead.<br />

10. Continue with the next monthly procedure or printing operations.<br />

Figure 5.3<br />

Grease locations, worm gear, printhead, print tower<br />

Grease fitting<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-5


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Check the Web Cleaner Filters<br />

Perform the following steps:<br />

1. At the web cleaner, turn off power (Figure 5.4).<br />

2. Remove the cover of the web cleaner housing.<br />

3. Inspect the prefilter for accumulated dust or chad.<br />

4. If the filter is dirty, perform “Replace the Web Cleaner Pre-filters” on<br />

page 5-10.<br />

5. Replace the cover.<br />

6. Turn on power to the web cleaner, and return to printing operations.<br />

Figure 5.4<br />

Web cleaner unit<br />

Lid (closed)<br />

Main power<br />

Print tower A<br />

On-Off switch<br />

Clean the Web Cleaner Internal Components<br />

The following procedure contains information provided by the<br />

manufacturer of the web cleaner. Its content is subject to change without<br />

notice. Refer to operator instructions provided with the web cleaner for<br />

additional information.<br />

Required Tools<br />

• Hand-held vacuum cleaner with soft brush attachment.<br />

Perform the following steps:<br />

1. Turn off the printing system, using the full procedure “Turning the<br />

Printing System Off” on page 2-53.<br />

2. Slide open the access door at the input to print tower A.<br />

3. Inside the print tower, open the web cleaner box (Figure 5.5).<br />

5-6 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Figure 5.5<br />

Web guide box, inside print tower A<br />

Web guide<br />

Web cleaner component<br />

Spacer unit<br />

4. Tear the web to access the lower web cleaner brushes.<br />

5. If better access is needed, pop off the hydraulic damper on the end.<br />

Caution: Points on the anti-static bars are sharp, and they may cause injury.<br />

6. With a soft brush attachment, vacuum the brushes, antistatic bar, and<br />

brush emitter pins.<br />

7. Route the web through the web cleaner, and splice the web.<br />

8. Close the web cleaner box, and close the access door to print tower<br />

A.<br />

9. Continue with the next monthly procedure, or turn on the printing<br />

system to continue printing operations.<br />

Check the HEPA Filter for Dust<br />

Perform the following steps:<br />

1. Using a safety ladder or scaffold, lift the grill at the top of the HEPA<br />

filter housing.<br />

2. Inspect the prefilter for any accumulation of dust or crystallized ink. If<br />

the filter is dirty, perform “Replace the HEPA Pre-filters” on page 5-<br />

10.<br />

3. Replace the grill, and return to printing operations.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-7


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Monthly Procedures<br />

Figure 5.6<br />

HEPA filter housing, print tower A<br />

Prefilter and grill<br />

On/Off switch<br />

Rewind Unit<br />

Perform the following monthly procedures when the rewind unit is in use.<br />

Supply Grease to the Rewind Unit<br />

Use the following procedure:<br />

1. At the rewind unit, bring the lift arms down, to move any roll away<br />

from the work area. (Use the first steps of “Loading and Unloading<br />

Paper at the Rewind Unit” on page 2-8.)<br />

2. Turn off the printing system, using the full procedure “Turning the<br />

Printing System Off” on page 2-53.<br />

Figure 5.7<br />

Grease locations, rewind unit, GS lift arm<br />

1<br />

2<br />

4<br />

5<br />

3<br />

6<br />

7<br />

5-8 VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Quarterly Procedures<br />

3. Repeat the following lettered steps for a total of six times at the<br />

following locations:<br />

• OS lift arm and OS interior wall: (1) Interlock bearing, (2) Lower<br />

support bearing, (3) Lift arm bearing,<br />

• GS lift arm and GS interior wall: (4) Interlock bearing, (5) Lower<br />

support bearing, (6) Lift arm bearing, .<br />

a. Attach the grease gun connector to a grease fitting shown in<br />

Figure 5.7.<br />

Note: The grease gun is supplied as an operator tool. The connector may<br />

be detached from the grease gun for easy storage in the supplied<br />

tool box.<br />

3 4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

5<br />

2<br />

b. Pump the grease gun handle two or three times. Stop pumping if<br />

grease squeezes out at the fitting.<br />

c. Wipe any remaining grease off the fitting and adjacent surfaces.<br />

4. Turn on the printing system, and raise the lift arms.<br />

5. Attach the grease gun connector to grease fitting (7) shown in Figure<br />

5.7, and apply grease. The fitting is at the OS end of the shaft and OS<br />

lift arm that are now in the lifted position<br />

7<br />

6. Continue with another next monthly procedure, or continue with<br />

printing operations.<br />

Note: Remember to raise the lift arms at the unwind unit.<br />

Quarterly Procedures<br />

Perform the following maintenance quarterly.<br />

There are no quarterly procedures for the unwind unit or rewind unit.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-9


Print Towers<br />

Perform Print Station Maintenance<br />

Refer to the Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> for the DT9000 series print stations for<br />

maintaining components at the printhead interface and vacuum cabinet.<br />

Replace the HEPA Pre-filters<br />

Use the following procedure at each print tower:<br />

1. Using a safety ladder or scaffold, remove the grill at the top of the<br />

HEPA filter housing.<br />

2. Remove the prefilter and discard it.<br />

3. Inspect the mesh filter for any accumulation of dust or crystallized ink.<br />

If the filter requires replacement, contact your service person.<br />

4. Install a replacement prefilter.<br />

5. Replace the grill, and return to printing operations.<br />

Figure 5.8<br />

HEPA filter housing, print tower A<br />

Prefilter and grill<br />

On/Off switch<br />

Replace the Web Cleaner Pre-filters<br />

Parts<br />

• 0195293 pre-filter<br />

• 0195294 mesh filter.<br />

Use the following procedure at each print bank:<br />

1. At the web cleaner, turn off power (Figure 5.4).<br />

2. Remove the cover of the web cleaner housing.<br />

3. Remove the pre-filter and discard it.<br />

4. Inspect the mesh filter for any accumulation of dust. If the filter is dirty,<br />

remove and discard the filter. Install a replacement mesh filter.


Chapter 5. Maintenance<br />

Annual Procedures<br />

5. Install a replacement pre-filter.<br />

6. Replace the cover.<br />

7. Turn on power to the web cleaner, and return to printing operations.<br />

Figure 5.9<br />

Pre-filter and mesh filter, web cleaner unit<br />

Pre-filter<br />

Mesh filter<br />

Annual Procedures<br />

None identified.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> 5-11


Appendix A. Metric-English<br />

Conversion<br />

Table A.1<br />

Conversion table, fractional inch to mm<br />

Some operator screens require a web width in millimeters. The following<br />

table assists in those conversions.<br />

inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm<br />

6 152.4 8 1/8 206.4 10 1/6 258.2 12 1/4 311.2 14 1/3 364.1 16 3/8 415.9 18 1/2 469.9<br />

6 1/8 155.6 8 1/6 207.4 10 1/4 260.4 12 1/3 313.3 14 3/8 365.1 16 1/2 419.1 18 5/8 473.1<br />

6 1/6 156.6 8 1/4 209.6 10 1/3 262.5 12 3/8 314.3 14 1/2 368.3 16 5/8 422.3 18 2/3 474.1<br />

6 1/4 158.8 8 1/3 211.7 10 3/8 263.5 12 1/2 317.5 14 5/8 371.5 16 2/3 423.3 18 3/4 476.3<br />

6 1/3 160.9 8 3/8 212.7 10 1/2 266.7 12 5/8 320.7 14 2/3 372.5 16 3/4 425.5 18 5/6 478.4<br />

6 3/8 161.9 8 1/2 215.9 10 5/8 269.9 12 2/3 321.7 14 3/4 374.7 16 5/6 427.6 18 7/8 479.4<br />

6 1/2 165.1 8 5/8 219.1 10 2/3 270.9 12 3/4 323.9 14 5/6 376.8 16 7/8 428.6 19 482.6<br />

6 5/8 168.3 8 2/3 220.1 10 3/4 273.1 12 5/6 326.0 14 7/8 377.8 17 431.8 19 1/8 485.8<br />

6 2/3 169.3 8 3/4 222.3 10 5/6 275.2 12 7/8 327.0 15 381.0 17 1/8 435.0 19 1/6 486.8<br />

6 3/4 171.5 8 5/6 224.4 10 7/8 276.2 13 330.2 15 1/8 384.2 17 1/6 436.0 19 1/4 489.0<br />

6 5/6 173.6 8 7/8 225.4 11 279.4 13 1/8 333.4 15 1/6 385.2 17 1/4 438.2 19 1/3 491.1<br />

6 7/8 174.6 9 228.6 11 1/8 282.6 13 1/6 334.4 15 1/4 387.4 17 1/3 440.3 19 3/8 492.1<br />

7 177.8 9 1/8 231.8 11 1/6 283.6 13 1/4 336.6 15 1/3 389.5 17 3/8 441.3 19 1/2 495.3<br />

7 1/8 181.0 9 1/6 232.8 11 1/4 285.8 13 1/3 338.7 15 3/8 390.5 17 1/2 444.5 19 5/8 498.5<br />

7 1/6 182.0 9 1/4 235.0 11 1/3 287.9 13 3/8 339.7 15 1/2 393.7 17 5/8 447.7 19 2/3 499.5<br />

7 1/4 184.2 9 1/3 237.1 11 3/8 288.9 13 1/2 342.9 15 5/8 396.9 17 2/3 448.7 19 3/4 501.7<br />

7 1/3 186.3 9 3/8 238.1 11 1/2 292.1 13 5/8 346.1 15 2/3 397.9 17 3/4 450.9 19 5/6 503.8<br />

7 3/8 187.3 9 1/2 241.3 11 5/8 295.3 13 2/3 347.1 15 3/4 400.1 17 5/6 453.0 19 7/8 504.8<br />

7 1/2 190.5 9 5/8 244.5 11 2/3 296.3 13 3/4 349.3 15 5/6 402.2 17 7/8 454.0 20 508.0<br />

7 5/8 193.7 9 2/3 245.5 11 3/4 298.5 13 5/6 351.4 15 7/8 403.2 18 457.2 20 1/8 511.2<br />

7 2/3 194.7 9 3/4 247.7 11 5/6 300.6 13 7/8 352.4 16 406.4 18 1/8 460.4 20 1/6 512.2<br />

7 3/4 196.9 9 5/6 249.8 11 7/8 301.6 14 355.6 16 1/8 409.6 18 1/6 461.4 20 1/4 514.4<br />

7 5/6 199.0 9 7/8 250.8 12 304.8 14 1/8 358.8 16 1/6 410.6 18 1/4 463.6 20 1/3 516.5<br />

7 7/8 200.0 10 254.0 12 1/8 308.0 14 1/6 359.8 16 1/4 412.8 18 1/3 465.7 20 3/8 517.5<br />

8 203.2 10 1/8 257.2 12 1/6 309.0 14 1/4 362.0 16 1/3 414.9 18 3/8 466.7 20 1/2 520.7<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong> A - 1


Appendix A. Metric-English Conversion<br />

Table A.2<br />

Conversion table, mm to fractional inch<br />

Some operator screens require a document length or fold length in whole<br />

inches and fractions of an inch. The following table assists in those<br />

conversions.<br />

mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch<br />

101.6 4 222.3 8 3/4 342.9 13 1/2 463.6 18 1/4 558.8 22 679.5 26 3/4 800.1 31 1/2 920.8 36 1/4<br />

104.8 4 1/8 224.4 8 5/6 346.1 13 5/8 465.7 18 1/3 562.0 22 1/8 681.6 26 5/6 803.3 31 5/8 922.9 36 1/3<br />

105.8 4 1/6 225.4 8 7/8 347.1 13 2/3 466.7 18 3/8 563.0 22 1/6 682.6 26 7/8 804.3 31 2/3 923.9 36 3/8<br />

108.0 4 1/4 228.6 9 349.3 13 3/4 469.9 18 1/2 565.2 22 1/4 685.8 27 806.5 31 3/4 927.1 36 1/2<br />

110.1 4 1/3 231.8 9 1/8 351.4 13 5/6 473.1 18 5/8 567.3 22 1/3 689.0 27 1/8 808.6 31 5/6 930.3 36 5/8<br />

111.1 4 3/8 232.8 9 1/6 352.4 13 7/8 474.1 18 2/3 568.3 22 3/8 690.0 27 1/6 809.6 31 7/8 931.3 36 2/3<br />

114.3 4 1/2 235.0 9 1/4 355.6 14 476.3 18 3/4 571.5 22 1/2 692.2 27 1/4 812.8 32 933.5 36 3/4<br />

117.5 4 5/8 237.1 9 1/3 358.8 14 1/8 478.4 18 5/6 574.7 22 5/8 694.3 27 1/3 816.0 32 1/8 935.6 36 5/6<br />

118.5 4 2/3 238.1 9 3/8 359.8 14 1/6 479.4 18 7/8 575.7 22 2/3 695.3 27 3/8 817.0 32 1/6 936.6 36 7/8<br />

120.7 4 3/4 241.3 9 1/2 362.0 14 1/4 482.6 19 577.9 22 3/4 698.5 27 1/2 819.2 32 1/4 939.8 37<br />

122.8 4 5/6 244.5 9 5/8 364.1 14 1/3 485.8 19 1/8 580.0 22 5/6 701.7 27 5/8 821.3 32 1/3 943.0 37 1/8<br />

123.8 4 7/8 245.5 9 2/3 365.1 14 3/8 486.8 19 1/6 581.0 22 7/8 702.7 27 2/3 822.3 32 3/8 944.0 37 1/6<br />

127.0 5 247.7 9 3/4 368.3 14 1/2 489.0 19 1/4 584.2 23 704.9 27 3/4 825.5 32 1/2 946.2 37 1/4<br />

130.2 5 1/8 249.8 9 5/6 371.5 14 5/8 491.1 19 1/3 587.4 23 1/8 707.0 27 5/6 828.7 32 5/8 948.3 37 1/3<br />

131.2 5 1/6 250.8 9 7/8 372.5 14 2/3 492.1 19 3/8 588.4 23 1/6 708.0 27 7/8 829.7 32 2/3 949.3 37 3/8<br />

133.4 5 1/4 254.0 10 374.7 14 3/4 495.3 19 1/2 590.6 23 1/4 711.2 28 831.9 32 3/4 952.5 37 1/2<br />

135.5 5 1/3 257.2 10 1/8 376.8 14 5/6 498.5 19 5/8 592.7 23 1/3 714.4 28 1/8 834.0 32 5/6 955.7 37 5/8<br />

136.5 5 3/8 258.2 10 1/6 377.8 14 7/8 499.5 19 2/3 593.7 23 3/8 715.4 28 1/6 835.0 32 7/8 956.7 37 2/3<br />

139.7 5 1/2 260.4 10 1/4 381.0 15 501.7 19 3/4 596.9 23 1/2 717.6 28 1/4 838.2 33 958.9 37 3/4<br />

142.9 5 5/8 262.5 10 1/3 384.2 15 1/8 503.8 19 5/6 600.1 23 5/8 719.7 28 1/3 841.4 33 1/8 961.0 37 5/6<br />

143.9 5 2/3 263.5 10 3/8 385.2 15 1/6 504.8 19 7/8 601.1 23 2/3 720.7 28 3/8 842.4 33 1/6 962.0 37 7/8<br />

146.1 5 3/4 266.7 10 1/2 387.4 15 1/4 508.0 20 603.3 23 3/4 723.9 28 1/2 844.6 33 1/4 965.2 38<br />

148.2 5 5/6 269.9 10 5/8 389.5 15 1/3 511.2 20 1/8 605.4 23 5/6 727.1 28 5/8 846.7 33 1/3 968.4 38 1/8<br />

149.2 5 7/8 270.9 10 2/3 390.5 15 3/8 512.2 20 1/6 606.4 23 7/8 728.1 28 2/3 847.7 33 3/8 969.4 38 1/6<br />

152.4 6 273.1 10 3/4 393.7 15 1/2 514.4 20 1/4 609.6 24 730.3 28 3/4 850.9 33 1/2 971.6 38 1/4<br />

155.6 6 1/8 275.2 10 5/6 396.9 15 5/8 516.5 20 1/3 612.8 24 1/8 732.4 28 5/6 854.1 33 5/8 973.7 38 1/3<br />

156.6 6 1/6 276.2 10 7/8 397.9 15 2/3 517.5 20 3/8 613.8 24 1/6 733.4 28 7/8 855.1 33 2/3 974.7 38 3/8<br />

158.8 6 1/4 279.4 11 400.1 15 3/4 520.7 20 1/2 616.0 24 1/4 736.6 29 857.3 33 3/4 977.9 38 1/2<br />

160.9 6 1/3 282.6 11 1/8 402.2 15 5/6 523.9 20 5/8 618.1 24 1/3 739.8 29 1/8 859.4 33 5/6 981.1 38 5/8<br />

161.9 6 3/8 283.6 11 1/6 403.2 15 7/8 524.9 20 2/3 619.1 24 3/8 740.8 29 1/6 860.4 33 7/8 982.1 38 2/3<br />

165.1 6 1/2 285.8 11 1/4 406.4 16 527.1 20 3/4 622.3 24 1/2 743.0 29 1/4 863.6 34 984.3 38 3/4<br />

168.3 6 5/8 287.9 11 1/3 409.6 16 1/8 529.2 20 5/6 625.5 24 5/8 745.1 29 1/3 866.8 34 1/8 986.4 38 5/6<br />

169.3 6 2/3 288.9 11 3/8 410.6 16 1/6 530.2 20 7/8 626.5 24 2/3 746.1 29 3/8 867.8 34 1/6 987.4 38 7/8<br />

171.5 6 3/4 292.1 11 1/2 412.8 16 1/4 533.4 21 628.7 24 3/4 749.3 29 1/2 870.0 34 1/4 990.6 39<br />

173.6 6 5/6 295.3 11 5/8 414.9 16 1/3 536.6 21 1/8 630.8 24 5/6 752.5 29 5/8 872.1 34 1/3 993.8 39 1/8<br />

174.6 6 7/8 296.3 11 2/3 415.9 16 3/8 537.6 21 1/6 631.8 24 7/8 753.5 29 2/3 873.1 34 3/8 994.8 39 1/6<br />

177.8 7 298.5 11 3/4 419.1 16 1/2 539.8 21 1/4 635.0 25 755.7 29 3/4 876.3 34 1/2 997.0 39 1/4<br />

181.0 7 1/8 300.6 11 5/6 422.3 16 5/8 541.9 21 1/3 638.2 25 1/8 757.8 29 5/6 879.5 34 5/8 999.1 39 1/3<br />

182.0 7 1/6 301.6 11 7/8 423.3 16 2/3 542.9 21 3/8 639.2 25 1/6 758.8 29 7/8 880.5 34 2/3 1000.1 39 3/8<br />

184.2 7 1/4 304.8 12 425.5 16 3/4 546.1 21 1/2 641.4 25 1/4 762.0 30 882.7 34 3/4 1003.3 39 1/2<br />

186.3 7 1/3 308.0 12 1/8 427.6 16 5/6 549.3 21 5/8 643.5 25 1/3 765.2 30 1/8 884.8 34 5/6 1006.5 39 5/8<br />

187.3 7 3/8 309.0 12 1/6 428.6 16 7/8 550.3 21 2/3 644.5 25 3/8 766.2 30 1/6 885.8 34 7/8 1007.5 39 2/3<br />

190.5 7 1/2 311.2 12 1/4 431.8 17 552.5 21 3/4 647.7 25 1/2 768.4 30 1/4 889.0 35 1009.7 39 3/4<br />

193.7 7 5/8 313.3 12 1/3 435.0 17 1/8 554.6 21 5/6 650.9 25 5/8 770.5 30 1/3 892.2 35 1/8 1011.8 39 5/6<br />

194.7 7 2/3 314.3 12 3/8 436.0 17 1/6 555.6 21 7/8 651.9 25 2/3 771.5 30 3/8 893.2 35 1/6 1012.8 39 7/8<br />

196.9 7 3/4 317.5 12 1/2 438.2 17 1/4 558.8 22 654.1 25 3/4 774.7 30 1/2 895.4 35 1/4 1016.0 40<br />

199.0 7 5/6 320.7 12 5/8 440.3 17 1/3 562.0 22 1/8 656.2 25 5/6 777.9 30 5/8 897.5 35 1/3 1019.2 40 1/8<br />

200.0 7 7/8 321.7 12 2/3 441.3 17 3/8 563.0 22 1/6 657.2 25 7/8 778.9 30 2/3 898.5 35 3/8 1020.2 40 1/6<br />

203.2 8 323.9 12 3/4 444.5 17 1/2 565.2 22 1/4 660.4 26 781.1 30 3/4 901.7 35 1/2 1022.4 40 1/4<br />

206.4 8 1/8 326.0 12 5/6 447.7 17 5/8 567.3 22 1/3 663.6 26 1/8 783.2 30 5/6 904.9 35 5/8 1024.5 40 1/3<br />

207.4 8 1/6 327.0 12 7/8 448.7 17 2/3 568.3 22 3/8 664.6 26 1/6 784.2 30 7/8 905.9 35 2/3 1025.5 40 3/8<br />

209.6 8 1/4 330.2 13 450.9 17 3/4 571.5 22 1/2 666.8 26 1/4 787.4 31 908.1 35 3/4 1028.7 40 1/2<br />

211.7 8 1/3 333.4 13 1/8 453.0 17 5/6 574.7 22 5/8 668.9 26 1/3 790.6 31 1/8 910.2 35 5/6 1031.9 40 5/8<br />

212.7 8 3/8 334.4 13 1/6 454.0 17 7/8 575.7 22 2/3 669.9 26 3/8 791.6 31 1/6 911.2 35 7/8 1032.9 40 2/3<br />

215.9 8 1/2 336.6 13 1/4 457.2 18 577.9 22 3/4 673.1 26 1/2 793.8 31 1/4 914.4 36 1035.1 40 3/4<br />

219.1 8 5/8 338.7 13 1/3 460.4 18 1/8 580.0 22 5/6 676.3 26 5/8 795.9 31 1/3 917.6 36 1/8 1037.2 40 5/6<br />

220.1 8 2/3 339.7 13 3/8 461.4 18 1/6 581.0 22 7/8 677.3 26 2/3 796.9 31 3/8 918.6 36 1/6 1038.2 40 7/8<br />

A - 2<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Glossary<br />

This appendix contains a glossary of terms used with the VX5000 printing<br />

system.<br />

1-up A data and print layout that results in printing a single document<br />

at any point on the web.<br />

2-up A data and print layout that results in printing separate documents<br />

side-by-side on the web.<br />

Advanced Function Printing (AFP) 1. A set of licensed programs,<br />

together with user applications, that use the all-points-addressable<br />

concept to print text, images, and graphics on a wide variety of printers.<br />

AFP includes creating, formatting, distributing, and printing information.<br />

Advanced Function Printing has evolved into Advanced Function<br />

Presentation.<br />

2. An architected print system that supports all-points-addressable<br />

printing on page printers, and that provides system management of the<br />

printer environment.<br />

air compressor A module that provides pressurized air to other<br />

modules of a printing system. The pressurized air may power lift arms, nip<br />

rollers, pull rollers, and other internal parts.<br />

AFP<br />

Advanced Function Printing.<br />

angle The position of the printhead and its print array that is measured<br />

in respect to the roller underneath the printhead. The optimum angle is 0°,<br />

or parallel to the roller.<br />

APR<br />

APU<br />

See rewind unit.<br />

See unwind unit.<br />

array The row of orifices in the printhead or a single line printed by a<br />

row of orifices.<br />

artificial cue A cue signal that is generated when an actual cue signal<br />

is not received from the cue sensor during the cue window. In some<br />

printing systems, cue compensation must be turned on before artificial<br />

cues are generated. See also cue.<br />

basis weight The weight in pounds of a ream of paper cut to a<br />

standard size for the grade of paper. Also grammage in metric<br />

measurements and web weight in American measurements.<br />

beater A component of a module that repeatedly brings the paper into<br />

a gripping component.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Glossary<br />

bitmap An arrangement of dots that represents text or graphics in an<br />

arrangement of binary 1s and 0s to represent the presence and absence<br />

of ink drops.<br />

carriage The components that hold and position a printhead interface<br />

inside a print tower.<br />

catch The operation of a printhead during which the charge voltage is<br />

activated for all jets and all ink drops are deflected to the catcher.<br />

catcher The part of the printhead that attracts charged drops falling<br />

from the orifices. See also charge plate, filament, orifice, and stim.<br />

catchpan The part attached to a printhead during service procedures<br />

to collect ink drops that would normally fall to the substrate.<br />

charge plate A row of exposed electric leads in the printhead. If the<br />

data indicates a dot is not required on the substrate, an individual charge<br />

lead is activated, imparting a charge to the ink drop. As it falls, the<br />

charged drop is attracted to the grounded catcher for recovery. If the data<br />

indicates a dot is required on the substrate, the charge lead is inactive,<br />

and the uncharged drop falls to the substrate. See also catcher, filament,<br />

orifice, and stim.<br />

charge short An error that occurs in the printhead when a charge lead<br />

is connected to ground or to another charge lead.<br />

charge voltage A voltage that determines whether an ink drop<br />

receives a charge. An operator can adjust the charge voltage. See also<br />

charge plate.<br />

compensator A set of rollers used for split web operations that require<br />

passing one half of the web through a turnbar while passing the other half<br />

of the web in parallel through a series of rollers that require the same<br />

distance for web movement as does the turnbar.<br />

compressor<br />

system.<br />

A module that provides pressurized air to the printing<br />

coning The result of winding paper on a core under constant tension,<br />

in which the paper gradually moves off center.<br />

control box<br />

a main switch.<br />

A module that allows switching one or more modules with<br />

controller Usually refers to the system controller, the module of the<br />

printing system that receives jobs from the data source and that is used<br />

by an operator to control the printing of the jobs.<br />

conveyor A module that moves folded or collated pieces away from<br />

the finishing equipment.<br />

correlation mark A machine-readable code for a number that checks<br />

the portions of a document match. For example, that the front and back<br />

sides in a duplex print job are at the same location on the web.<br />

Correlation marks are read by sensor hardware set up for page<br />

correlation use.<br />

crooked jet An ink jet that leaves the orifice at an odd angle. Crooked<br />

jets can splatter ink on the substrate or put ink on the charge leads,<br />

sometimes causing charge shorts and poor print quality.<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Glossary<br />

cue A signal that represents the start of a document. A cue signal<br />

occurs each time the cue sensor detects the leading edge of a piece of<br />

substrate or a preprinted cue mark on a web.<br />

cue delay 1. A measure of the distance from a cue sensor to each<br />

downstream printhead array. 2. A measure of the distance from the first<br />

upstream cue sensor to each downstream cue sensor and from the<br />

downstream cue sensor to each downstream printhead array.<br />

cue interval The distance between cue marks on a web. This distance<br />

usually equals the document length plus the space between two<br />

documents.<br />

cue mark A preprinted mark on a web that is the reference point for the<br />

start of a new document.<br />

cue noise A false cue signal that results from some object or<br />

imperfection on the substrate that the cue sensor detects or from<br />

imperfections in the circuitry of the cue sensor. See also false cue.<br />

cue sensor A sensor that detects the beginning of a mark on a web or<br />

the leading edge of a piece of substrate.<br />

cue window<br />

expected.<br />

An interval during which a signal from the cue sensor is<br />

curtain The effect visible under a printhead when all ink jets are<br />

operating and out of catch. The faint shimmering is produced by the ink<br />

jets as they fall from the printhead.<br />

dark defect A dark area in the image caused by allowing more than<br />

one drop to fall for each dot or from allowing ink jets to release ink when<br />

they should not. The dark defect can occur throughout the width of the<br />

image, but it may be concentrated at the ends or near the center of the<br />

image.<br />

dark line A narrow line of ink that appears in half-tone images and<br />

under certain conditions in text printing. The symptom results from an ink<br />

jet that releases drops when it should not. The extra drops are released<br />

when an adjacent ink jet is on, which indicates the charge circuits are<br />

shorted together.<br />

data controller The module of the printing system that receives IPDS<br />

jobs from the data source and that is used by an operator to control the<br />

printing of the jobs.<br />

decurler A section of one or more modules that flattens the web to<br />

avoid curling, cupping, and cockling.<br />

document A unit of input data that is printed in one area of the<br />

substrate. A document may include more than one page. Most common<br />

data preparation establishes one document for each cue mark on a web<br />

or one document for each piece in cut-sheet printing. See also page.<br />

dot 1. The smallest mark that can be printed by the printing system.<br />

2. The distance between pixels (dots) in the printed image. With a 240-dpi<br />

resolution, a distance of 1 dot equals 1 /240 inch.<br />

downstream The direction that is the same as substrate movement.<br />

See also upstream.<br />

dpi<br />

Dots per inch. A measure of resolution.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Glossary<br />

duplex<br />

To print on both sides of the page.<br />

edge guide<br />

See web guide.<br />

end raggedness A disturbance of the regular placement of ink drops,<br />

which is most noted at the ends of the image area.<br />

Ethernet A link-level standard for data communications over a local<br />

area network (LAN).<br />

eyelid The part of the printhead that opens to allow uncharged drops to<br />

fall to the substrate. When closed, the eyelid protects the interior of the<br />

printhead from damage and limits the ingestion of dust that could<br />

contaminate the ink.<br />

false cue A cue signal that occurs when a signal that exceeds the cue<br />

noise setting occurs outside of the cue window. See also cue noise.<br />

filament A short, continuous stream of ink that extends from the orifice,<br />

which is broken into drops by the measured application of a physical<br />

vibration. See also catcher, charge plate, orifice, and stim.<br />

fixed data Print fields containing text or graphics that are printed on<br />

every document or on selected documents. See also variable data.<br />

fixed message A text message composed during data preparation that<br />

can be printed on every document or on selected documents.<br />

fluid cabinet The part of the print station that supplies ink to the<br />

printhead, withdraws ink from the printhead, and allows an operator or<br />

technician to control the print station.<br />

font A collection of characters that have the same typeface, style,<br />

weight, and point size. In KODAK VERSAMARK printing systems, fonts can<br />

also contain graphics identified by one or more characters codes.<br />

fpm<br />

Feet per minute. Equivalent to 0.3048 meters per minute.<br />

ghosting A print sample that has a small band of intermittent dark and<br />

light portions, which is caused by an incorrect phase setting.<br />

grammage The basis weight of paper used in the printing system. Also<br />

web weight in American measurements.<br />

gripper pressure<br />

rollers.<br />

The amount of air pressure applied to the gripper<br />

gripper roller A mechanism that uses a driven roller and two or more<br />

grippers to pull web from the upstream modules and maintain tension in<br />

the printing system.<br />

gripper wheel<br />

See gripper roller.<br />

GS Gear side. The long side of the printing system that has direct<br />

access to facility power, facility air, dryer ducting and the print stations.<br />

height The position of the printhead and its print array that is measured<br />

in respect to the roller underneath the printhead. The optimum printhead<br />

height is 0.075 to 0.100 inch (1.90 to 2.54 mm) above the roller.<br />

HEPA<br />

High Efficiency Particulate Air.<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Glossary<br />

HEPA filter A type of air filtration that limits the environmental dust to a<br />

level suitable for printing with the KODAK VERSAMARK DH90, DH91, and<br />

DH92 printheads.<br />

IJP<br />

Inkjet Printer. See print tower.<br />

IJPDS Inkjet Printer Data Stream. The proprietary file format for job<br />

files used with KODAK VERSAMARK printing systems. See also job file.<br />

image A pattern of filled and unfilled dots. It can be a character, a line<br />

of characters, or a graphic.<br />

infeed<br />

module.<br />

A portion of a module that moves the web from the previous<br />

ink jet The stream of ink made up of the filament and drops coming<br />

from one orifice.<br />

ink pressure The pressure that helps to determine the length of an ink<br />

filament. Ink pressure, together with the stim, determines the length of an<br />

ink filament created before a drop breaks off. Pressure and stim also<br />

determine the size and speed of the drops.<br />

IP address Network address for stations on Ethernet using TCP/IP<br />

protocol. Also called internet address and inet address.<br />

IPDS Intelligent Printer Data Stream. 1. An all-points-addressable<br />

(APA) data stream that allows users to position text, images, and graphics<br />

at any defined point on a printed page.<br />

2. In printers, information the system sends to printers that contains<br />

decision-making capability. Generally, this information contains basic<br />

formatting, error recovery, and character data.<br />

3. An architected host-to-printer data stream that contains both data and<br />

controls defining how the text, image, graphics, and barcode are to be<br />

presented and that provides a device-independent interface for controlling<br />

APA printers, such as the IBM 3900 AFP Printer.<br />

jam detector A component of one or more modules that avoids an<br />

accumulation of wasted product due to a failure in a finishing operation.<br />

jet The stream of ink made up of the filament and drops coming from<br />

one orifice.<br />

job file A file that contains information describing a print job. The file<br />

can contain setup information, fixed messages, font information, and<br />

variable data.<br />

Job Setup Sheet A document prepared by the provider of a job file that<br />

specifies the machine configuration and special printing reqruirements of<br />

the job.<br />

jog To move the web at a predetermined slow speed as long as the<br />

JOG button is pressed. Jogging can occur while errors are active.<br />

lateral The cross-web direction, used in reference to printhead<br />

movement, spiral movement in the folding unit, and perforation<br />

orientation.<br />

LED Light emitting device. A diode or other semiconducting device that<br />

emits visible light when it is active.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Glossary<br />

lift arm A section of an unwind unit or rewind unit that lifts a roll of<br />

paper and holds it in place.<br />

light print A constant difference in relative darkness between images<br />

printed by adjacent printheads. Light print tends to lower the contrast in<br />

graphic portions of the image.<br />

mandrel<br />

A shaft that can hold a core or other form for paper rolls.<br />

M master. The group of print towers that provide control information to<br />

another group of print towers in the printing system.<br />

mandrel lateral adjust A mechanism at the unwind unit that positions<br />

the shaft and roll up to 2 inch (5 cm) forward and back between OS and<br />

GS.<br />

manual clutch A section of an unwind unit or rewind unit that engages<br />

or disengages the web movement to or from the mandrel.<br />

misplaced end drops<br />

image area.<br />

Irregular printing at the ends of the vertical<br />

missing cue A cue signal that is not received from the cue sensor<br />

during the cue window.<br />

missing jet A white line that appears where ink should be, caused by<br />

high charge voltage, contamination on the eyelid or inside the eyelid, or<br />

an open circuit.<br />

mount The components of a carriage that allow attachment of the<br />

printhead interface to the carriage.<br />

open A break in the charge lead circuit that prevents signals from<br />

reaching the charge lead. The drops receive a sympathetic charge from<br />

the neighboring circuits and are deflected to the catcher. The deflected<br />

drops cause gaps in the pattern when one or a few adjacent circuits are<br />

open. When a large number of adjacent circuits are open, the end drops<br />

might be deflected and caught, but the center ones produce a streaker.<br />

orifice A small hole through which pressurized ink extends in a<br />

filament. A 4" printhead has a row of orifices, spaced 240 per inch.<br />

See also catcher, charge plate, filament, and stim.<br />

OS Operator side. The long side of the printing system that gives an<br />

operator direct access to operator controls, the internal components while<br />

webbing the system, and observing the progress of the print job.<br />

outfeed<br />

A portion of a module that moves the web to the next module.<br />

page The data for a document in a page buffer. If the document data is<br />

equal to or less than the page buffer length, there is one page per<br />

document. If the document data length is greater than the length of the<br />

page buffer, there are two or more pages per document. See also<br />

document.<br />

page buffer Memory in a RIP in which pages are assembled for<br />

printing. The buffer size is printer dependent.<br />

page correlation A feature of the printing system that assures that all<br />

pages of a document are produced at the correct location on the web.<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Glossary<br />

page length The number of dot rows to be printed. The page length<br />

can be set by the IJPDS SPL record to be longer or shorter than the<br />

image. If shorter, the image will be clipped. If longer, white space is<br />

printed to the end of the page.<br />

PIC box<br />

See printhead interface.<br />

pickout An area of an image sample that appears as an intermittent<br />

white line where ink should be, caused by a high charge voltage; also<br />

called a missing jet.<br />

piece A discrete segment of substrate upon which the image is printed.<br />

For example, an envelope.<br />

powder brake A component of the unwind unit that uses magnetic<br />

particles to stop the revolutions of the unwind shaft and web.<br />

print array The row of orifices in the printhead or a single line printed<br />

by a row of orifices.<br />

print field A portion of the complete document image that can be<br />

positioned and rotated separately.<br />

print position The location of a printhead when it places ink on the<br />

web in registration to the printing from other printheads.<br />

print station The component of the printing system that receives<br />

image data in bitmapped format from the data station and produces a<br />

printed image as output. Each print station contains a fluid cabinet,<br />

umbilical, and printhead.<br />

print tower A module that contains one or more sets of a carriage,<br />

mount, and printhead.<br />

print width The maximum width of the area that can be printed by the<br />

printhead. It is usually given in inches or dots.<br />

print window<br />

can occur.<br />

The range of charge voltage in which acceptable printing<br />

printhead The part of the print station that forms charged ink drops,<br />

allows uncharged drops to fall on the substrate, and recovers charged<br />

drops to be returned to the fluid cabinet. The printhead receives data in<br />

bitmapped format through a fiberoptic cable and uses ink and charge<br />

voltages from the fluid cabinet to create inkjet images.<br />

printhead interface The assembly that contains circuit boards,<br />

manifolds and sensors, and that holds the printhead in place over the<br />

substrate.<br />

processing unit<br />

punch or both.<br />

A module that contains a cross-perforator or marginal<br />

pull ratio A screen that allows alteration of the tension applied to the<br />

web throughout the printing system.<br />

pull roller A section of one or more modules that accepts the web<br />

input to the module and advances the web by its powered, gripping<br />

rollers. See gripper roller.<br />

punch-perforation A processing action that provides both marginal<br />

punch and cross-perforation to the web.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Glossary<br />

raster<br />

A rectangular bitmap arranged in rows of dots.<br />

registration<br />

graphics.<br />

Positioning printing in relationship to preprinted text or<br />

registration, data A fine-tuning of cue delay that results in aligning the<br />

different planes of the printed product along the direction of web<br />

movement.<br />

registration, printhead A fine-tuning of registration that results in<br />

aligning the different planes of the printed product across the direction of<br />

web movement.<br />

resolution The degree of sharpness of an image created by a<br />

computer, measured in dots per inch (dpi).<br />

rewind unit<br />

A module that takes up the printed web into a roll.<br />

RIP Raster image processor. The part of the system controller that<br />

builds raster bitmaps from character data received from the print job and<br />

sends bit-mapped data to the printheads.<br />

roll end sensor A sensor that may be positioned to create a signal<br />

when the roll at the unwind has nearly emptied.<br />

run fast To run the web at a speed determined by the operator. Run<br />

fast may be selected while no errors are active, the brake is set to ON, the<br />

lift arms are up, and the operator key is set to ON.<br />

run slow To run the web at a predetermined speed that is faster than<br />

jog speed, while no errors are active, the brake is set to ON, the lift arms<br />

are up, and the operator key is set to ON.<br />

S slave. The group of print towers that receives control information<br />

from another group of print towers in the printing system.<br />

service position The location of a printhead when it is pulled away<br />

from print position and beyond the OS side of the printing system to allow<br />

full access to the printhead for cleaning, swabbing, replacement, or<br />

service.<br />

shaft The rotating assembly that holds the supply core and paper at<br />

the unwind unit or the take-up core and paper at the rewind unit. Also<br />

mandrel.<br />

sheeter-stacker unit A module that provides a complementary series<br />

of any of the following finishing actions on the web: slitting, collating,<br />

sheeting, and stacking.<br />

short An undesired electrical connection between two or more circuits<br />

for charge leads. When one of the shorted circuits receives a signal, the<br />

signal is also sent to the other charge circuits, causing drops that should<br />

reach the substrate to be deflected to the catcher.<br />

skew The position of the printhead and its print array that is measured<br />

in respect to the roller underneath the printhead. The optimum skew is 0°,<br />

or parallel to the roller.<br />

splatter<br />

Ink drops scattered across the substrate in unwanted places.<br />

s-pull roller A gripper roller that uses two rollers that pull the web<br />

without exerting pressure on another roller.<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Glossary<br />

still picture unit A module that photographs the printed image without<br />

stopping the printing operation and displays the image on a monitor.<br />

stim A regular vibration (stimulation) at a controlled amplitude that<br />

breaks the ink filaments extending from the orifices into drops. See also<br />

catcher, charge plate, filament, and orifice.<br />

stim phase A value that determines when a charge is given to the<br />

drops as they form. The cycle of forming a drop is divided into sixteen<br />

segments, which are called phases. Stim phases are the segments<br />

numbered 0 through 15. An operator can change the stim phase, using<br />

the parameter adjustments screen.<br />

stim tab An interior part of the printhead that detects the amplitude of<br />

stim and provides a feedback voltage to regulate the stim voltage.<br />

stim voltage The voltage applied to the crystal attached to the<br />

resonator in the printhead to create a stimulation of a certain amplitude<br />

and frequency.<br />

stitching The process where a single contiguous image is produced<br />

by two or more printheads.<br />

streaker A recurring streak of ink caused by one or more jets printing<br />

continuously or by ink dripping from a part of the printhead, creating a line<br />

(streak) on the substrate.<br />

strobe A section of the still picture unit that flashes in synchronization<br />

to the web speed and the length of the printed product, and that allows<br />

viewing of the print results without stopping the printing operation.<br />

substrate The surface on which an image is printed. The substrate can<br />

be a continuous sheet (web) or separate pieces of various types of<br />

material.<br />

system controller The component of a printing system that accepts<br />

input data, formats the data according to job setup instructions, and sends<br />

character-coded image data to the appropriate RIPs.<br />

tab An interior part of the printhead that detects the amplitude of stim<br />

and provides a feedback voltage to regulate the stim voltage.<br />

tach 1. A measure of distance, as measured by the tach encoder.<br />

When using 240 dpi resolution, one tach is 1 /240 inch (0.00416 inch, 0.105<br />

mm).<br />

2. A signal emitted by the tach encoder in response to the speed of the<br />

substrate.<br />

tach encoder A part that detects movement of the substrate and<br />

generates tach signals in relationship to the substrate speed.<br />

tension controller A component of the unwind unit or rewind unit that<br />

determines how tension is maintained throughout the printing system.<br />

test page A printed standard page that contains data that readily<br />

shows faults in registration, printhead skew, and other printhead<br />

characteristics.<br />

trailing A small dripping effect at the upstream edge of boldface<br />

characters and solid tones.<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Glossary<br />

transformer<br />

output.<br />

A module that converts an input voltage to a desired<br />

turnbar A section of one or more modules that turns the printed face of<br />

the web down and allows printing on the reverse face.<br />

umbilical The part of the print station that carries ink and signals<br />

between the fluid cabinet and the printhead through an assembly of<br />

hoses and wiring within a flexible, protective shield.<br />

unwind unit<br />

A module that lets out the web from a roll.<br />

upstream The direction that is opposite that of the substrate<br />

movement. See also downstream.<br />

variable data Print fields that change from document to document.<br />

See also fixed data.<br />

VST Variable speed transport. A mode of printing system control that<br />

allows the volume of data supplied by the SC300 to vary the speed of web<br />

movement and dryer intensity.<br />

waviness A disturbance of the regular placement of ink drops caused<br />

by air flow disrupting the paths of the uncharged drops from the orifice to<br />

the substrate.<br />

web<br />

A continuous sheet of substrate.<br />

web break sensor A section of one or more modules that detects<br />

cross-stream tears in the web and creates a signal that stops the web<br />

movement.<br />

web guide A component of one or more modules that keeps the web<br />

in the same cross-stream position.<br />

web joint detector A section of one or more modules that detects<br />

momentary changes in web thickness and creates a signal that can stop<br />

printing and finishing operations on that section of the web as it moves<br />

through the printing system.<br />

web weight The basis weight of paper used in the printing system.<br />

Also grammage in metric measurements.<br />

worm gear An assembly of a motor driving a fixed, long screw and a<br />

component that moves along the screw by means of an attached lateral<br />

gear box.<br />

zeroing The controlled, automatic alignment that moves a component<br />

to a known position and resets measurements from that known position.<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Index<br />

Symbols<br />

+ - paired buttons, on operator display 1-26<br />

+ 0[.]00, on operator display 1-26<br />

[Printhead number] motor error 4-15<br />

Numerics<br />

200-V power switch 1-2<br />

400-V power switch 1-2<br />

A<br />

A unit<br />

OS1 cover error 4-10<br />

OS2 cover error 4-10<br />

step cover error 4-10<br />

Access<br />

panels, unwind 1-4<br />

Activate button (Sleep Mode screen) 2-55<br />

Adjusting<br />

cue sensitivity 3-19–3-21<br />

gripper rollers 2-14–2-15<br />

web guide 2-12–2-13<br />

Air<br />

[number] heater break error 4-11<br />

[number] temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

gun 1-5<br />

on operator display 1-27<br />

overheat error 4-11<br />

press. down error 4-11<br />

pressure gauge 1-4, 1-8<br />

temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

Alarm<br />

external controls on unit 1-7<br />

All Off button (Details screen)<br />

emergency shutdown 2-54<br />

All Off button (Summary screen)<br />

shutting down all connected printheads 2-56, 2-57<br />

Annual maintenance 5-11<br />

APR<br />

cover open error 4-6<br />

cover screen 4-15–4-16<br />

error 4-6<br />

error screen 1-32, 4-16–4-17<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

APS<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

pull, on operator display 1-25<br />

APU<br />

cover open error 4-5<br />

cover screen 1-31, 4-8–4-10<br />

error 4-5<br />

error screen 1-31, 4-7–4-8<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

screen 1-22–1-23<br />

Arm<br />

GS cover error 4-9, 4-16<br />

OS cover error 4-9, 4-16<br />

up-down error 4-7, 4-16<br />

Arrow buttons<br />

on operator display 1-28<br />

paired buttons, on operator display 1-26<br />

B<br />

Blower error 4-12<br />

Brake off-on 1-6<br />

C<br />

C unit cover error 4-10<br />

catch<br />

shutting down printheads 2-56<br />

catchpan<br />

shutting down printheads 2-56<br />

Changing<br />

print speed 2-53<br />

web weight 2-22<br />

CKMY printing order 3-2<br />

Compen<br />

cover error 4-10<br />

motor error 4-8<br />

Compensation, speed 3-27–3-29<br />

Compressor<br />

description 1-3<br />

error 4-7<br />

Control box, description 1-2<br />

Controls<br />

+ - paired buttons, on operator display 1-26<br />

+ 0[.]00, on operator display 1-26<br />

200-V power switch 1-2<br />

400-V power switch 1-2<br />

air [number] temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

air gun 1-5<br />

air pressure gauge 1-4, 1-8<br />

air temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

air, on operator display 1-27<br />

alarm 1-7<br />

angle, printhead 1-16<br />

APR, on operator display 1-20<br />

APS pull, on operator display 1-25<br />

APS, on operator display 1-20<br />

APU, on operator display 1-20<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Index<br />

arrow buttons, on operator display 1-28<br />

arrow paired buttons, on operator display 1-26<br />

brake off-on 1-6<br />

corrected temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

cover up/down 1-12, 1-17, 1-18<br />

cue sensor 1-11, 1-12, 1-17<br />

cue sensor position 1-13, 1-17, 1-18<br />

dancer tension controller 1-37<br />

d-outfeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed M, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

drum GS temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

drum OS temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

drum temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

drum, on operator display 1-27<br />

dryer status, on operator display 1-27<br />

dryer, on operator display 1-20, 1-21<br />

emerg. reset 1-18<br />

emergency stop 1-6, 1-18<br />

enter, on operator display 1-26<br />

error, on operator display 1-28, 1-29<br />

fast stop, on operator display 1-22<br />

finishing option, correct selection of for printing 1-20<br />

gripper air pressure 1-37<br />

gripper on-off 1-37<br />

gripper pressure 1-17, 1-18<br />

gripper wheel off-on 1-13, 1-17, 1-18<br />

GS, on operator display 1-29<br />

height adjust 1-16<br />

home, on operator display 1-28<br />

hours indicator 1-4<br />

image data, on operator display 1-21<br />

image test, on operator display 1-21<br />

inch / mm, on operator display 1-29<br />

infeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

infeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

job speed buttons, on operator display 1-21<br />

jog 1-6, 1-12<br />

jog key 1-18<br />

jog, on operator display 1-20, 1-22<br />

keypad, on operator display 1-29<br />

lateral, on operator display 1-29<br />

lift arm air pressure 1-37<br />

main switch (compressor) 1-4<br />

main switch (transformer) 1-3<br />

main, on operator display 1-20<br />

mandrel lateral adjust 1-8<br />

MAPZ pull, on operator display 1-25<br />

MAPZ, on operator display 1-20<br />

normal stop, on operator display 1-21<br />

off, on operator display 1-27<br />

on, on operator display 1-27<br />

operator key 1-18<br />

option 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

option 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

OS, on operator display 1-29<br />

outfeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

outfeed 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

outfeed M, on operator display 1-25<br />

outfeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

printhead angle 1-16<br />

printhead height adjust 1-16<br />

printhead skew adjust 1-16<br />

printhead tilt 1-16<br />

pull ratio, on operator display 1-24, 1-26<br />

punch, on operator display 1-25<br />

ready 1-6, 1-12<br />

ready, on operator display 1-22<br />

registration, on operator display 1-20<br />

return, on operator display 1-28<br />

rewinder shaft down-n-up 1-37<br />

rewinder tension on-off 1-36<br />

rewinder tension under-over 1-36<br />

roll end off-on 1-6<br />

roll end sensor 1-5<br />

run fast, on operator display 1-22<br />

run slow 1-7<br />

run slow, on operator display 1-22, 1-23<br />

send mail 4-6<br />

set lever 1-16<br />

shaft down-n-up 1-6<br />

skew adjust 1-16<br />

skip, on operator display 1-23<br />

speed fpm, on operator display 1-21<br />

speed mpm, on operator display 1-21<br />

stand-by temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

start, on operator display 1-29<br />

stop 1-12<br />

stop button, behind interlocked OS door 1-12<br />

stop button, hidden 1-12, 1-22, 4-1<br />

stop machine 1-6<br />

stop, on operator display 1-23, 1-29<br />

taper setting 1-36<br />

temperature gauge 1-4<br />

tension controller 1-7<br />

tension meter 1-36<br />

tension setting 1-36<br />

turnbar 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

turnbar M, on operator display 1-25<br />

turnbar S, on operator display 1-25<br />

VST state, on operator display 1-21<br />

web break sensor 1-8<br />

web break, on operator display 1-21<br />

web guide 1-12<br />

web guide controller 1-7<br />

web guide sensor 1-8, 1-11<br />

web guide sensor position 1-8<br />

web tension infeed 1-13<br />

web tension outfeed 1-13<br />

web weight g/m 2 , on operator display 1-24<br />

web weight, on operator display 1-24<br />

web, on operator display 1-20, 1-27<br />

Corrected temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

Correlation, page 1-19, 2-48–2-51, 3-29–3-30<br />

sensor positioning 2-51–2-52<br />

Cover<br />

open error 4-11<br />

up/down 1-12, 1-17, 1-18<br />

Cue sensor 1-11, 1-12, 1-17<br />

adjusting sensitivity 3-19–3-21<br />

position 1-13, 1-17, 1-18<br />

positioning 2-30–2-32<br />

D<br />

D unit<br />

dryer cover error 4-11<br />

slide cover error 4-11<br />

step cover error 4-10<br />

Daily maintenance 5-2<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Index<br />

Dancer tension controller 1-37<br />

Data<br />

recovering 2-47<br />

reprinting 2-47<br />

Data, how to print 2-42–2-43<br />

Data, how to set up 2-35–2-41<br />

DC 300<br />

operator information 1-37<br />

setting cue delay 3-26–3-27<br />

Detection of roll end, setting 2-58–2-59<br />

Diameter maximum error 4-5<br />

Display descriptions 1-19–1-32<br />

D-Outfeed<br />

d-outfeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed M, on operator display 1-25<br />

d-outfeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

Drum<br />

[number] heater break error 4-12<br />

GS temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

on operator display 1-27<br />

OS temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

overheat error 4-11<br />

temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

Dryer<br />

changing temperature 2-34–2-35<br />

error 4-6<br />

error screen 1-30, 4-11–4-12<br />

on operator display 1-20, 1-21<br />

screen 1-26–1-28<br />

status, on operator display 1-27<br />

webbing 2-17–2-18<br />

DT9000<br />

operator information 1-38<br />

DT9000 Series Print Station<br />

operator information 1-38<br />

Duplex print jobs 2-18, 3-5<br />

register front-to-back 2-46<br />

E<br />

Emergency stop 1-6, 1-18<br />

recovery from 2-52<br />

Enter, on operator display 1-26<br />

Error<br />

on operator display 1-28, 1-29<br />

screen 1-29–1-30, 4-5–4-6<br />

Errors<br />

[printhead number] motor error 4-15<br />

A unit OS1 cover 4-10<br />

A unit OS2 cover 4-10<br />

A unit step cover 4-10<br />

air [number] heater break 4-11<br />

air overheat 4-11<br />

air press. down 4-11<br />

APR cover open 4-6<br />

APR error 4-6<br />

APU 4-5<br />

APU cover open 4-5<br />

arm GS cover 4-9, 4-16<br />

arm OS cover 4-9, 4-16<br />

arm up-down 4-7, 4-16<br />

blower error 4-12<br />

C unit cover 4-10<br />

checking for presence 2-52<br />

compen cover 4-10<br />

compen motor 4-8<br />

compressor 4-7<br />

cover open 4-11<br />

D unit dryer cover 4-11<br />

D unit slide cover 4-11<br />

D unit step cover 4-10<br />

diameter maximum 4-5<br />

drum [number] heater break 4-12<br />

drum overheat 4-11<br />

dryer error 4-6<br />

gripper roll 4-6, 4-8<br />

GS limit error 4-14<br />

GS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-14<br />

GS over limit 4-14<br />

GS over limit error 4-14<br />

GS1 cover 4-8, 4-9, 4-16<br />

GS2 cover 4-8, 4-16<br />

hit to cover 4-18<br />

IJP cover open 4-6<br />

interlock off 4-7, 4-17<br />

interlock on 4-7, 4-16<br />

jog over speed 4-7<br />

lateral motor error 4-12<br />

lateral zero positioning not possible during machine<br />

running 4-13<br />

lateral zero positioning start 4-15<br />

lateral zero positioning stop 4-15<br />

motor [number] 4-6<br />

neglect break 4-12<br />

OS limit error 4-13<br />

OS limit error do latel zero positioning 4-14<br />

OS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-13<br />

OS over limit 4-13<br />

overheatung is unusual the breaker of a heater is turned<br />

off 4-17<br />

paper end 4-5<br />

PLC battery low 4-17<br />

print error 4-5<br />

process unit oil pump error 4-17<br />

punch blower 4-7<br />

punch cover 4-9<br />

punch reguration 4-7<br />

punch screw 4-7<br />

remove catchpan or service tool 4-18<br />

reset 4-12, 4-15<br />

rewinder invertor 4-17<br />

rewinder invertor fan 4-17<br />

send mail 4-15<br />

servo battery low 4-17<br />

slide cover 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-16<br />

slitter motor 4-17<br />

tension off 4-17<br />

upper cover 4-8, 4-9, 4-15<br />

upper cover closed 4-17<br />

warning<br />

GS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-14<br />

GS over limit 4-14<br />

hit to cover 4-18<br />

lateral zero positioning not possible during machine<br />

running 4-13<br />

OS limit error do latel zero positioning 4-14<br />

OS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-13<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Index<br />

F<br />

OS over limit 4-13<br />

remove catchpan or service tool 4-18<br />

upper cover closed 4-17<br />

web break 4-5<br />

Fast stop, on operator display 1-22<br />

G<br />

Getting started<br />

overview of operating 2-1<br />

Gripper<br />

adjusting rollers 2-14–2-15<br />

air pressure 1-37<br />

gripper on-off 1-37<br />

gripper roll error 4-6<br />

pressure 1-17, 1-18<br />

roll error 4-8<br />

wheel off-on 1-13, 1-17, 1-18<br />

GS<br />

GS limit error 4-14<br />

GS over limit error 4-14<br />

on operator display 1-29<br />

GS1 cover error 4-8, 4-9, 4-16<br />

GS2 cover error 4-8, 4-16<br />

H<br />

Height<br />

height adjust knob, printhead 1-16<br />

of printhead 2-26–2-27<br />

Home, on operator display 1-28<br />

Hours indicator 1-4<br />

How to ...<br />

adjust cue sensitivity 3-19–3-21<br />

adjust gripper rollers 2-14–2-15<br />

adjust web guide 2-12–2-13<br />

align web guide. Refer to the manufacturer documents.<br />

bypass sheeter-stacker unit 2-20<br />

change dryer temperature 2-34–2-35<br />

change printing speed 2-53<br />

change web weight 2-22<br />

check for errors 2-52<br />

configure page correlation 2-48–2-51, 3-29–3-30<br />

identify printheads 3-2–3-6<br />

jog 2-14<br />

load paper rolls 2-4–2-7, 2-8–2-10<br />

move printhead to print position 2-25<br />

move printhead to service position 2-24<br />

number printheads 3-2–3-6<br />

overview of procedures 2-1<br />

position cue sensor 2-30–2-32<br />

position page correlation sensor 2-51–2-52<br />

position web break sensor 2-32–2-34<br />

position web guide sensors. Refer to the manufacturer<br />

documents.<br />

print job 2-42–2-43<br />

print test pages 2-41–2-42<br />

recover from emergency stop 2-52<br />

recover from stops 2-52<br />

select printing speed 2-53<br />

select roll end detection 2-58–2-59<br />

select web direction 2-22<br />

select web weight 2-22<br />

set cue delay at the controller 3-22–3-27<br />

set printhead height 2-26–2-27<br />

set printhead position 2-43–2-45, 2-45–2-46, 3-22–<br />

3-27<br />

set printhead registration 2-43–2-45, 2-45–2-46, 3-<br />

22–3-27<br />

set printhead skew 2-28–2-29<br />

set speed compensation 3-27–3-29<br />

set up print job 2-35–2-41<br />

set web tension 2-23–2-24, 3-16–3-17<br />

turn off printing system 2-53–2-57<br />

turn on printing system 2-3<br />

unload paper rolls 2-4–2-7, 2-8–2-10<br />

web dryer 2-17–2-18<br />

web duplex job 2-18<br />

web print towers 2-15–2-19<br />

web printing system 2-4–2-24<br />

web rewind unit 2-20–2-21<br />

web spacer unit 2-13<br />

web turnbar 2-19<br />

web two-up job 2-18<br />

web unwind unit 2-10–2-13<br />

zero printheads 3-17–3-18<br />

I<br />

IJP cover<br />

open error 4-6<br />

screen 1-30, 4-10–4-11<br />

Image<br />

image data, on operator display 1-21<br />

image test, on operator display 1-21<br />

Inch / mm, on operator display 1-29<br />

Infeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

Infeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

Ink, order of printing 3-2<br />

Interlock<br />

off error 4-7, 4-17<br />

on error 4-7, 4-16<br />

J<br />

Job speed buttons, on operator display 1-21<br />

Jobs<br />

duplex 2-18, 3-5<br />

duplex process color 3-5<br />

how to print 2-42–2-43<br />

how to set up 2-35–2-41<br />

process color 3-2<br />

two-up 2-18<br />

two-up duplex process color 3-6<br />

two-up process color 3-5<br />

Jog<br />

button 1-12<br />

button on unwind, print tower and rewind 1-6<br />

key 1-18<br />

on operator display 1-20, 1-22<br />

over speed error 4-7<br />

Jogging web 2-14<br />

K<br />

Keypad<br />

on operator display 1-29<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Index<br />

L<br />

Lateral<br />

lateral motor error 4-12<br />

lateral zero positioning start error 4-15<br />

lateral zero positioning stop error 4-15<br />

motor error 4-12<br />

on operator display 1-29<br />

Lift arms<br />

air pressure 1-37<br />

rewind 1-35<br />

unwind 1-5<br />

M<br />

Main<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

switch 1-3<br />

switch (compressor) 1-4<br />

Main screen<br />

print tower D 1-19–1-22<br />

Maintenance<br />

annual operator 5-11<br />

daily operator 5-2<br />

monthly operator 5-2–5-9<br />

quarterly operator 5-9–5-11<br />

weekly operator 5-2<br />

Mandrel 1-5<br />

lateral adjust 1-8<br />

MAPZ<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

pull, on operator display 1-25<br />

Monthly maintenance 5-2–5-9<br />

Motor [number] error 4-6<br />

N<br />

Neglect break error 4-12<br />

Nip roller. See Gripper rollers<br />

Normal stop, on operator display 1-21<br />

O<br />

Off, on operator display 1-27<br />

On, on operator display 1-27<br />

Operator<br />

annual maintenance 5-11<br />

daily maintenance 5-2<br />

display, at print tower D 1-19–1-32<br />

key 1-18<br />

monthly maintenance 5-2–5-9<br />

quarterly maintenance 5-9–5-11<br />

weekly maintenance 5-2<br />

Option 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

Option 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

OS<br />

limit error 4-13<br />

on operator display 1-29<br />

over limit error 4-13<br />

Outfeed 1, on operator display 1-25<br />

Outfeed 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

Outfeed M, on operator display 1-25<br />

Outfeed S, on operator display 1-25<br />

Overheatung is unusual the breaker of a heater is turned off<br />

4-17<br />

P<br />

Page<br />

page correlation 2-48–2-51, 3-29–3-30<br />

page correlation sensor 2-51–2-52<br />

Page correlation 1-19<br />

Paper end<br />

paper end error 4-5<br />

Paper, loading and unloading 2-4–2-7, 2-8–2-10<br />

PLC battery low 4-17<br />

Positioning<br />

cue sensor 2-30–2-32<br />

web break sensor 2-32–2-34<br />

Power switch<br />

200-V 1-2<br />

400-V 1-2<br />

main (transformer) 1-3<br />

Print error 4-5<br />

Print jobs<br />

duplex 2-18, 3-5<br />

duplex process color 3-5<br />

order of printing colors 3-2<br />

printing test pages 2-41–2-42<br />

printing the job 2-42–2-43<br />

process color 3-2<br />

setting up the job 2-35–2-41<br />

two-up 2-18<br />

two-up duplex process color 3-6<br />

two-up process color 3-5<br />

Print position 2-25<br />

defined 1-15<br />

Print tower<br />

A, control descriptions 1-11–1-16<br />

B, control descriptions 1-16–1-17<br />

C, control descriptions 1-16–1-17<br />

D, control descriptions 1-17–1-19<br />

monthly maintenance 5-5<br />

webbing 2-15–2-19<br />

Printhead<br />

angle 1-16<br />

height adjust knob 1-16<br />

identities 1-16, 3-2–3-6<br />

identity in controller 3-2–3-6<br />

identity in PSI 3-2–3-6<br />

moving to print position 2-25<br />

moving to service position 2-24<br />

number in printing system 3-2–3-6<br />

operator information 1-38<br />

printhead lateral error screen 1-31, 4-14–4-15<br />

printhead limit error screens 4-12–4-14<br />

set lever 1-16<br />

setting height 2-26–2-27<br />

setting position 2-43–2-45, 2-45–2-46, 3-22–3-27<br />

setting registration 2-43–2-45, 2-45–2-46, 3-22–3-27<br />

setting skew 2-28–2-29<br />

skew adjust 1-16<br />

tilt 1-16<br />

zeroing 3-17–3-18<br />

Printhead Sequence buttons<br />

All Off 2-54<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Index<br />

printheads<br />

shutting down all connected printheads 2-56, 2-57<br />

Printing system<br />

turning off 2-53–2-57<br />

turning on 2-3<br />

Process color print jobs 3-2, 3-5<br />

order of printing colors 3-2<br />

Process unit oil pump error 4-17<br />

PSI<br />

operator information 1-38<br />

Pull ratio<br />

on operator display 1-24, 1-26<br />

pull ratio screen 1-24–1-26<br />

Punch<br />

on operator display 1-25<br />

punch blower error 4-7<br />

punch cover error 4-9<br />

punch reguration error 4-7<br />

punch screw error 4-7<br />

Q<br />

Quarterly maintenance 5-9–5-11<br />

R<br />

Ready<br />

button 1-6, 1-12<br />

on operator display 1-22<br />

Recovering<br />

from emergency stop 2-52<br />

from error stops 2-52<br />

Recovering data 2-47<br />

Registration<br />

data 2-43–2-45<br />

of duplexed sides 2-46<br />

on operator display 1-20<br />

printhead 2-43–2-46, 3-22–3-27<br />

Registration screen<br />

print tower D 1-28–1-29<br />

Reprinting data 2-47<br />

Reset error 4-12, 4-15<br />

Return, on operator display 1-28<br />

Rewind unit<br />

control descriptions 1-35–1-37<br />

monthly maintenance 5-8–5-9<br />

procedures 2-59<br />

webbing 2-20–2-21<br />

Rewinder<br />

invertor error 4-17<br />

invertor fan error 4-17<br />

rewinder shaft down-n-up 1-37<br />

rewinder tension on-off 1-36<br />

rewinder tension under-over 1-36<br />

Roll end<br />

detection, setting 2-58–2-59<br />

off-on 1-6<br />

sensor 1-5<br />

Rolls, paper loading and unloading 2-4–2-7, 2-8–2-10<br />

Run fast<br />

does not operate 4-1<br />

on operator display 1-22<br />

Run slow<br />

button 1-7<br />

does not operate 1-7, 4-1<br />

on operator display 1-22, 1-23<br />

S<br />

Screens<br />

APR cover 4-15–4-16<br />

APR error 1-32, 4-16–4-17<br />

APU cover 4-8–4-10<br />

APU cover screen 1-31<br />

APU error 1-31, 4-7–4-8<br />

APU screen 1-22–1-23<br />

descriptions, at print tower D 1-19–1-32<br />

dryer error 4-11–4-12<br />

dryer error screen 1-30<br />

dryer screen 1-26–1-28<br />

error screen 1-29–1-30, 4-5–4-6<br />

IJP cover 4-10–4-11<br />

IJP cover screen 1-30<br />

main screen, print tower D 1-19–1-22<br />

printhead lateral error 4-14–4-15<br />

printhead lateral error screen 1-31<br />

printhead limit error 4-12–4-14<br />

pull ratio screen 1-24–1-26<br />

registration screen, print tower D 1-28–1-29<br />

web screen 1-23–1-24<br />

screens<br />

Sleep Mode 2-54<br />

Selecting ...<br />

print speed 2-53<br />

web direction 2-22<br />

web weight 2-22<br />

Send mail 4-6<br />

error 4-15<br />

Sequence text field<br />

SHUTDOWNPRG sequence 2-56, 2-57<br />

sequences<br />

SHUTDOWNPRG 2-56, 2-57<br />

Service position 2-24<br />

Servo<br />

servo battery low 4-17<br />

Set<br />

printhead set lever 1-16<br />

Setting<br />

printhead height 2-26–2-27<br />

printhead registration 2-43–2-45, 2-45–2-46, 3-22–<br />

3-27<br />

printhead skew 2-28–2-29<br />

web tension 2-23–2-24, 3-16–3-17<br />

Shaft<br />

down-n-up 1-6<br />

unwind 1-5<br />

Sheeter-stacker unit<br />

bypass while webbing system 2-20<br />

shutdown<br />

all connected printheads 2-56, 2-57<br />

SHUTDOWNPRG sequence 2-56, 2-57<br />

Shutting down printing system 2-53–2-57<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


Index<br />

Skew<br />

adjust knob 1-16<br />

of printhead 2-28–2-29<br />

Skip<br />

on operator display 1-23<br />

Sleep Mode button 2-54<br />

Sleep Mode screen 2-54<br />

Slide cover error 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-16<br />

Slitter<br />

slitter motor error 4-17<br />

Spacer unit<br />

description 1-9<br />

webbing 2-13<br />

Speed<br />

selecting and changing 2-53<br />

speed compensation 3-27–3-29<br />

speed fpm, on operator display 1-21<br />

speed mpm, on operator display 1-21<br />

Stand-by<br />

temp, on operator display 1-27<br />

Start<br />

on operator display 1-29<br />

Starting<br />

printing system 2-3<br />

Status, checking 2-52<br />

Stop<br />

behind interlocked OS door 1-12<br />

button 1-12<br />

emerg. reset 1-18<br />

hidden 1-12, 1-22, 4-1<br />

machine button 1-6<br />

on operator display 1-23, 1-29<br />

recovering from emergency stop 2-52<br />

recovery 2-52<br />

Subsystem bar buttons<br />

Sleep Mode 2-54<br />

Summary screen buttons<br />

All Off 2-56, 2-57<br />

Switching on printing system 2-3<br />

Synchronization. See Page correlation. 1-19<br />

T<br />

Taper setting 1-36<br />

Temperature<br />

changing of dryer 2-34–2-35<br />

gauge 1-4<br />

Tension<br />

controller 1-7<br />

setting web 2-23–2-24, 3-16–3-17<br />

tension meter 1-36<br />

tension off error 4-17<br />

tension setting 1-36<br />

Test pages, how to print 2-41–2-42<br />

Test pattern, how to print 2-41–2-42<br />

Transformer, description 1-3<br />

Turnbar<br />

turn-bar 2, on operator display 1-25<br />

turn-bar M, on operator display 1-25<br />

turn-bar S, on operator display 1-25<br />

webbing 2-19<br />

Turning off printing system 2-53–2-57<br />

Turning on printing system 2-3<br />

Two-up print jobs 2-18<br />

U<br />

Unwind unit<br />

control descriptions 1-4–1-9<br />

monthly maintenance 5-2–5-4<br />

procedures 2-58–2-59<br />

Upper cover error 4-8, 4-9, 4-15<br />

V<br />

VST state, on operator display 1-21<br />

W<br />

Wakeup Date drop-down list 2-55<br />

Warning<br />

GS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-14<br />

GS over limit 4-14<br />

hit to cover 4-18<br />

Lateral zero positioning not possible during machine<br />

running 4-13<br />

OS limit error do latel zero positioning 4-14<br />

OS limit error do lateral zero positioning 4-13<br />

OS over limit 4-13<br />

remove catchpan or service tool 4-18<br />

upper cover closed 4-17<br />

Warnings, checking for presence 2-52<br />

Web<br />

changing weight 2-22<br />

direction 2-22<br />

loading and unloading 2-4–2-7, 2-8–2-10<br />

on operator display 1-20, 1-27<br />

tension 2-23–2-24, 3-16–3-17<br />

web screen 1-23–1-24<br />

Web break<br />

error 4-5<br />

on operator display 1-21<br />

sensor 1-8<br />

sensor positioning 2-32–2-34<br />

Web cleaner<br />

description 1-10<br />

Web guide 1-12<br />

adjustment 2-12–2-13<br />

alignment. Refer to the manufacturer documents.<br />

controller 1-7<br />

positioning sensors. Refer to the manufacturer<br />

documents.<br />

sensor 1-8, 1-11<br />

sensor position button 1-8<br />

Web tension<br />

infeed 1-13<br />

outfeed 1-13<br />

Web weight<br />

changing 2-22<br />

g/m 2 , on operator display 1-24<br />

on operator display 1-24<br />

Webbing<br />

dryer 2-17–2-18<br />

one-up, duplex two-color over two-color 3-3<br />

Operator’s <strong>Guide</strong>


Index<br />

one-up, process color 2-16<br />

printing system 2-4–2-24<br />

rewind unit 2-20–2-21<br />

sheeter-stacker unit bypassed 2-20<br />

turnbar 2-19<br />

two-up, two-color 2-16, 3-4, 3-5<br />

unwind unit 2-10–2-13<br />

Weekly maintenance 5-2<br />

Z<br />

Zeroing printheads 3-17–3-18<br />

VX5000/5000e Printing Systems


0114304-602<br />

0114304-603<br />

© <strong>Kodak</strong>

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!